JP2016067747A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of enhancing fun of a game when a player plays the game.SOLUTION: A game machine includes: a plurality of inversion operation parts 71 each having a first decoration board 711A for forming a display part 71E for performing predetermined display at mutually gathered positions; and an inversion drive part 73 for moving the plurality of inversion operation parts 71 between a position where the plurality of inversion operation parts 71 gather and a position where they are separated mutually. When each of the plurality of inversion operation parts 71 returns to a gathering position through a separated position from a gathering position by the inversion drive part 73, display by the display part 71E by each of the plurality of inversion operation parts 71 becomes different from that before movement by the inversion drive part 73.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 35-7

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a slot machine that displays a lottery result when a plurality of reels are stopped in a combination of symbols when a pachinko gaming machine that wins a jackpot by winning a game ball or a game medium is inserted.

  For example, Patent Document 1 discloses a gaming machine in which an accessory body is arranged in front of a display surface of an image display device. In the case body in this gaming machine, an elevating rack that can reciprocate in the vertical direction is disposed opposite to the opening in front view. Further, the transport pin provided on one end side of the accessory body is connected to the connecting hole of the lifting rack, and the transport pin provided on the other end side of the accessory body is connected to the connecting hole of the lifting rack. Furthermore, the connection hole is a long hole having play in the left-right direction when viewed from the front.

JP 2013-236803 A

  An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the interest of a game when a player plays a game.

  The present invention that achieves the above object is realized as the following gaming machine. This gaming machine is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 100) that performs a predetermined effect, and forms a surface (for example, a display unit 71E) that performs a predetermined display at a position where the gaming machines gather together. , A plurality of decorative portions (for example, the reversing operation portion 71) each having the first decorative plate 711A) and a position where each of the plurality of decorative portions (for example, the reversing operation portion 71) is separated from the gathering position. Moving means (for example, a reversal drive unit 73) for moving the plurality of decoration units (for example, the reversing operation unit 71) between each of the plurality of decoration units (for example, the reversing operation unit 71). When the moving means (for example, the reverse driving unit 73) returns from the gathering position to the gathering position through the separated position, the display by each of the plurality of decoration parts (for example, the reverse operation unit 71). Part (example If a display unit 71E) by the display is the mobile unit (e.g., a game machine characterized by comprising different from the previous movement by inversion driving section 73) (e.g., a pachinko game machine 100).

  In addition, the said code | symbol in this column is attached | subjected illustratively in the description of this invention, and this invention is not reduced by this code | symbol.

  ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, the game machine which can improve the interest property of a game when a player plays a game can be provided.

It is a schematic front view of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. (A) is an enlarged view showing an example of a display device arranged at the lower right of the game board, (b) is a partial plan view of the pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure which shows the internal structure of the control unit of the pachinko game machine of this Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the function structure of the game control part of this Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the operation | movement of the basic process by a game control part. It is a flowchart which shows the operation | movement of the process at the time of power-off by the game control part. It is a flowchart which shows the main control processing of a game control part. It is a flowchart which shows the content of a start port switch process. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the gate switch process. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the special symbol process. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the jackpot determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the fluctuation pattern selection process. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the process during a stop. It is a flowchart which shows the content of a customer waiting | standby setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the content of normal symbol processing. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the big prize opening process. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the game state setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the content of an electric tulip process. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the random number used by this Embodiment, (a) is a figure which shows the structural example of jackpot random number, (b) is a figure which shows the structural example of jackpot symbol random number, (c ) Is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a reach random number, and (d) is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a hit random number. It is a figure which shows the example of a setting of the fluctuation pattern used in a fluctuation pattern selection process. It is a figure which shows the structure of a command, (a) is a figure which shows the data structure of a command, (b) is a figure which shows the structure as a bit string of a command. It is a flowchart which shows operation | movement of an effect control part, (a) is a figure which shows a main process, (b) is a figure which shows an interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows the content of command reception processing. It is a figure which shows the example of a setting of a mode flag. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the production | presentation selection process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the process during completion | finish of the fluctuation effect of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the win production | presentation selection process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the ending effect selection process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the customer waiting command reception process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the content of effect button processing. It is a block diagram explaining the structural example of RAM of a game control part, (a) is a block diagram which shows the structure of a storage area, (b) is a block diagram which shows each structure of the memory | storage part shown to (a) It is. It is a block diagram explaining the structural example of RAM of an effect control part, (a) is a block diagram which shows the structure of a storage area, (b) is a block which shows each structure of the memory | storage part shown to (a) FIG. It is a figure which shows the example of a structure of the random number used by a prior judgment process, (a) is a figure which shows the example of a structure of the jackpot random number in a prior judgment process, (b) is the structure of the jackpot symbol random number in a prior judgment process It is a figure which shows an example, (c) is a figure which shows the structural example of the reach random number in a prior determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the prior determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the reception process of the alerting | reporting command by an effect control part. It is a figure explaining the modeling movable body of a movable accessory. It is a disassembled perspective view of a modeling movable body. It is a figure explaining the raising / lowering mechanism for raising / lowering a main-body part. It is a figure explaining the raising / lowering mechanism for raising / lowering a main-body part. It is a figure explaining the raising / lowering mechanism for raising / lowering a main-body part. It is a rear view explaining the raising / lowering mechanism for raising / lowering a right position part. It is a schematic front view explaining the relative positional relationship of a main-body part and a right position part. It is a figure explaining the rotation mechanism for rotating the left position part. It is a figure explaining the rotation mechanism for rotating the left position part. It is a figure explaining the rotation mechanism for rotating the left position part. It is a schematic front view explaining the relative positional relationship of a main-body part and a left position part. It is a figure explaining the motion production which a modeling movable body performs. It is a figure explaining the motion production which a modeling movable body performs. It is a figure explaining the motion production which a modeling movable body performs. It is a figure explaining the relative positional relationship of the fist member with respect to a main-body part in case a left position part moves. It is a schematic perspective view explaining the wiring structure with which a modeling movable body is provided. It is a figure explaining the rotation mechanism which concerns on the modification for rotating a left position part. It is a figure explaining the rotation mechanism which concerns on the modification for rotating a left position part. It is a figure explaining the rotation mechanism which concerns on the modification for rotating a left position part. It is a figure explaining the rotation mechanism which concerns on the modification for rotating a left position part. It is a figure explaining the rotation mechanism which concerns on the modification for rotating a left position part. It is a figure which shows a fluctuation production. It is a figure showing other change productions. It is a figure which shows the standby state of the moving part of a vehicle type robot part. It is a figure which shows the appearance state of the moving part of a vehicle type robot part. It is a figure for demonstrating a series of motion of the moving part of this Embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating a 1st expectation effect. It is a figure for demonstrating a 2nd expectation effect. It is a figure which shows the whole structure of a vehicle type robot part. It is a figure which shows the deformation | transformation part base and left-right direction moving part of this Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the deformation | transformation mechanism part of this Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the base member of this Embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the movement of the position of a moving part. It is a figure for demonstrating the vibration operation | movement in the up-down direction of a deformation | transformation part. It is a figure for demonstrating a title logo part. It is a figure for demonstrating a production body. It is a figure for demonstrating a 1st inversion operation | movement part. It is a figure for demonstrating the structure of a magnet. It is a figure for demonstrating an inversion drive part. It is a figure for demonstrating an expansion-contraction mechanism. It is a figure for demonstrating operation | movement of an inversion operation | movement part. It is a figure for demonstrating operation | movement of an inversion operation | movement part. It is a figure for demonstrating operation | movement of an inversion operation | movement part. It is a figure for demonstrating operation | movement of an inversion operation | movement part. It is a figure for demonstrating a support body. It is a figure for demonstrating a support body. It is a figure for demonstrating a biasing part. It is a figure for demonstrating a movement support part. It is a disassembled perspective view of a movement support part. It is a disassembled perspective view of a movement support part. It is a figure for demonstrating operation | movement of a movement support part. It is a figure for demonstrating operation | movement of a title logo part. It is a figure for demonstrating operation | movement of a title logo part. It is a figure for demonstrating operation | movement of a title logo part. It is a figure for demonstrating the other application example of a title logo part.

Embodiments of the present invention will be described below in detail with reference to the accompanying drawings.
[Basic configuration of gaming machine]
FIG. 1 is a schematic front view of a pachinko gaming machine 100 according to the present embodiment.
A pachinko gaming machine 100 as an example of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1 is configured to pay out a prize ball when a gaming ball launched by an instruction operation by a player wins. The pachinko gaming machine 100 includes a game board 110 on which game balls are launched, and a frame member 150 surrounding the game board 110. The game board 110 is detachably attached to the frame member 150.
In the following description, the direction of the upper side and the lower side of the paper surface of the pachinko gaming machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 is referred to as the vertical direction, and the direction of the left side and the right side of the paper is referred to as the horizontal direction. Furthermore, the side on which the player plays the game with respect to the pachinko gaming machine 100 shown in FIG.

The game board 110 has a game area 111 for playing with a game ball on the front surface, a rail member 112 that forms a passage where a game ball launched from below rises toward the upper position of the game area 111, and a game A guide member 113 for guiding the game ball is provided on the right side of the region 111.
In the present embodiment, an image display unit 114 that displays various images for production is provided at a position of the game area 111 that is easily visible to the player. The image display unit 114 includes a display screen such as a liquid crystal display, and displays a decorative symbol for notifying the player of a symbol lottery result (symbol variation result), for example, as the game progresses by the player. An effect image by the appearance of a character or the appearance of an item or an effect image using a later-described hold display is displayed.
In addition, a movable accessory 115 and a board lamp 116 used for various effects are provided on the front surface of the game board 110. The movable accessory 115 performs various effects by operating on the game board 110, and the board lamp 116 performs various effects by emitting light.
And the movable accessory 115 of this Embodiment has the modeling movable body 4, the vehicle-type robot part 5, and the title logo part 7, as shown in FIG.

  The game area 111 is provided with a game nail and a windmill (not shown) for changing the direction in which the game ball falls. Further, in the game area 111, various bonuses relating to winning and lottery are arranged at predetermined positions. In addition, the game area 111 is provided with a discharge port 117 through which game balls launched into the game area 111 that have not been won in the winning area are discharged out of the game area 111.

  In the present embodiment, as various functions related to winning and lottery, a special symbol lottery (a jackpot lottery) starts when a game ball wins, and it is normal when a game ball passes. A start gate (hereinafter simply referred to as a gate) 124 for starting a symbol lottery (open / close lottery) is disposed on the game board 110. In FIG. 1, the gates 124 are provided on the left and right sides of the game area 111, the left gate 124 is indicated as 124L, and the right gate 124 is indicated as 124R. Moreover, the 1st starting port 121 and the 2nd starting port 122 here say the winning opening used as the operation opportunity of the predetermined 1 special symbol display. Specifically, the first start port 121 and the second start port 122 are provided with switches (a first start port switch 211 and a second start port switch 212 described later) that detect the passage of a game ball when winning a prize. It has been. And when a game ball wins the 1st starting port 121 or the 2nd starting port 122, this switch will detect the passage of a gaming ball as an opportunity to operate a special symbol display.

  The second start port 122 includes an electric tulip (opening / closing member) 123 as a normal electric accessory that is turned on and off with a single blade opened and closed by an electric solenoid. In the electric tulip 123, when the blade is closed, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second start port 122, but when the blade is opened, the entrance of the second start port 122 is expanded and the game ball is moved to the second start port 122. It is configured to be easy to enter. When the electric tulip 123 wins the normal symbol lottery, the blade opens for a specified time (for example, 0.15 to 1.8 seconds) and for a specified number of times (for example, 1 to 3 times) while lighting or blinking. The electric tulip 123 may be configured such that a pair of blades in the shape of a tulip is opened and closed by an electric solenoid.

  The pachinko gaming machine 100 has, as gaming states, a low probability state with a low winning probability and a high probability state with a higher winning probability than the low probability state based on the winning probability of the jackpot lottery. And it is controlled to either the low probability state or the high probability state under a predetermined condition. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 100 has a short time state where there are few winning opportunities at the second start port 122 and a short state when there are more winning opportunities at the second start port 122 than in the short time state. Then, under a predetermined condition, the state is controlled to either the timeless state or the timeless state. The short-time state is controlled by any one or a combination of, for example, increasing the probability of winning the normal symbol lottery, reducing the normal symbol variation time, or extending the opening time of the electric tulip 123. It is a gaming state to be played. In the short time state, the special symbol variation time of the special symbol may be shortened.

In the present embodiment, the other prize-winning and lottery items include the special prize-winning port 125 and the second big prize-winning port 127 that are opened according to the result of the special symbol lottery, and the game balls. The game board 110 is provided with a normal winning opening 126 that does not draw even when winning.
In the present embodiment, a display 130 for displaying a lottery result and the number of holds is arranged at the lower right position of the game board 110.

  Also, on the back side of the game board 110, a game control board that determines whether or not a special symbol is won, an effect control board that comprehensively controls effects, an image control board that controls effects by images and sounds, various lamps, Various substrates (not shown) such as a lamp control substrate for controlling the effect by the movable accessory 115 are attached. In addition, a switching power supply (not shown) that converts the supplied 24V AC power source into a DC power source and outputs it to various boards and the like is disposed on the back surface of the game board 110.

When the player touches the handle 151 and rotates the lever 152 in the clockwise direction, the frame member 150 moves the game balls at a predetermined time interval (for example, 100 per minute) with a hitting force according to the operation angle. And a launching device (not shown) for electrically firing. In addition, the frame member 150 includes a supply device (not shown) that sequentially supplies game balls to the launching device one by one at a timing in conjunction with the operation of the player's lever 152, and a game ball that the supply device supplies to the launching device And a plate 153 for temporarily storing. For example, a payout ball by a payout unit is paid out to the plate 153.
In the present embodiment, the plate 153 is configured as an integrated upper and lower plate, but a configuration example in which the upper plate and the lower plate are separated is also conceivable. A configuration example in which the handle 151 of the launching device emits light under a predetermined condition is also conceivable.

Further, the frame member 150 includes a stop button 154 for temporarily stopping the launch of the game ball even when the player is touching the handle 151 of the launch device, and a game ball accumulated in the tray 153. A take-out button 155 for dropping and taking out the box (not shown).
Further, the frame member 150 includes a speaker 156 and a frame lamp 157 for notifying the gaming state and situation of the pachinko gaming machine 100 and performing various effects. The speaker 156 performs various effects using music, voice, and sound effects. The frame lamp 157 is composed of a light emitting body such as an LED, and performs various effects by light depending on a pattern due to lighting and blinking, a difference in emission color, and the like. In addition, about the frame lamp | ramp 157, the structural example which enables it to perform the effect which changes the irradiation direction of light can be considered.
The frame member 150 also includes a transparent plate (not shown) for separating the game board 110 from the player.

FIG. 2 is a view for explaining the pachinko gaming machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 2A is an enlarged view showing an example of the display unit 130 arranged at the lower right of the game board 110. FIG. 2B is a partial plan view of the pachinko gaming machine 100.
As shown in FIG. 2A, the display 130 of the pachinko gaming machine 100 receives a first special symbol display 221 that operates in response to winning of the first starting port 121 and a winning of the second starting port 122. A second special symbol display 222 that operates correspondingly and a normal symbol display 223 that operates corresponding to the passage of the gate 124 are provided. The first special symbol display unit 221 displays the lottery result after stopping displaying the special symbol based on the winning of the first start port 121 after variably displaying. The second special symbol display 222 displays the lottery result after the special symbol is variably displayed on the basis of the winning of the second start port 122 after being variably displayed. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the gate 124, the normal symbol display 223 displays the lottery result by stopping the normal symbol after variably displaying it. In the present embodiment, the first special symbol display 221 and the second special symbol display 222 are each constituted by a display device in which LEDs are arranged, and the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is displayed according to the lighting mode. Similarly, the normal symbol display 223 is also composed of a display device in which LEDs are arranged, and the lottery result of the normal symbol lottery is displayed according to the lighting mode.

  In addition, the indicator 130 operates in response to the hold in the first special symbol display 221 and the first special symbol hold indicator 218 that operates corresponding to the hold in the first special symbol display 221 and the second special symbol display 222. 2 a special symbol hold indicator 219 and a normal symbol hold indicator 220 that operates in response to the hold in the normal symbol indicator 223. In the present embodiment, the first special symbol hold indicator 218, the second special symbol hold indicator 219, and the normal symbol hold indicator 220 are each configured by a display device in which LEDs are arranged, and the number of holds is determined depending on the lighting mode. Is displayed.

  Here, the hold will be described. If a game ball wins in the first start port 121 or the second start port 122 during the special symbol change display operation (while the change display for one win is being performed), the special symbol is changing. In addition, the special symbol variation display operation based on the subsequent winning cannot be started. Therefore, the number of subsequent winnings is memorized up to a specified number (for example, 4), and the right to start a special symbol for the winning game ball is until the variable display operation for the previously winning game ball ends. Deferred. For normal symbols, the same processing as for special symbols is performed. The fact that such a hold has been made and the number of hold (unchanged number) are displayed on the first special symbol hold indicator 218, the second special symbol hold indicator 219 and the normal symbol hold indicator 220.

Furthermore, the display device 130 includes a state display device 224 that displays the state of the pachinko gaming machine 100. In the present embodiment, the status indicator 224 is configured by a display device in which three LEDs are arranged. One of the three LEDs notifies whether or not the state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in a high probability state where the winning probability of the special symbol lottery is high. The other one is to notify by lighting whether the state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in a short time state in which it is easy to win a prize at the second start port 122. Still another one is to notify by lighting whether or not the player is in a state advantageous to the player by making a right strike (by changing the hitting force of the game ball).
The state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 displayed by the state display 224 is not limited to the above example, and other states can be displayed. For example, when the state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is set to a medium probability state in which the winning probability is higher than the low probability state and the winning probability is lower than the high probability state, the state indicator 224 indicates whether or not the state indicator 224 is in the medium probability state. May be notified by lighting.

  In addition, the indicator 130 includes a round number indicator 225 for displaying the number of rounds when the big winning opening 125 is operated in the jackpot game performed according to the lottery result of the special symbol lottery. The jackpot game will be described later. The round number display 225 is configured by a display device in which LEDs are arranged, and the number of operating rounds of the big winning opening 125 in the jackpot game is displayed according to the lighting mode.

  The frame member 150 of the pachinko gaming machine 100 includes an input device for a player to input an effect. As shown in FIG. 2B, in the present embodiment, as an example of an input device, an effect button 161, an effect key 162 that is adjacent to the effect button 161 and includes a plurality of keys arranged in a substantially cross shape, Is disposed on the frame member 150. In the illustrated example, the player can instruct one of a plurality of images displayed on the image display unit 114 by operating an effect key 162 including four keys arranged in a cross, for example. It is possible to select the designated image by operating the effect button 161. In addition to the effect buttons 161 and the effect keys 162 shown in the figure, various input forms such as levers, dials, and the like can be adopted as the input device.

[Configuration of control unit]
Next, a control unit that performs operation control and signal processing in the pachinko gaming machine 100 will be described.
FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an internal configuration of the control unit. As shown in FIG. 3, the control unit includes a game control unit 200 that determines whether a special symbol is won or the like as main control means. Further, as sub-control means, an effect control unit 300 that comprehensively controls effects, an image / sound control unit 310 that controls effects using images and sound, and effects using various lamps and movable accessories 115 A lamp control unit 320 for controlling the payout, and a payout control unit 330 for performing payout control of the payout ball.

  As described above, the game control unit 200, the effect control unit 300, the image / sound control unit 310, the lamp control unit 320, and the payout control unit 330 are each a game as a main board disposed on the rear surface of the game board 110. The control board, the effect control board as the sub board, the image control board, the lamp control board, and the payout control board are individually configured.

[Configuration and function of game control unit]
The game control unit 200 is used as a CPU 201 that performs arithmetic processing when determining whether or not a special symbol is won, a ROM 202 that stores programs executed by the CPU 201, various data, and the like, a working memory of the CPU 201, and the like. RAM 203 to be provided.
When the game ball wins the first start port 121 or the second start port 122, the game control unit 200 performs a special symbol lottery and sends the lottery result to the effect control unit 300. In addition, the change information of the high probability state and the low probability state and the change information of the short time state and the short time state are sent to the effect control unit 300.
Further, the game control unit 200 performs control to increase the probability of winning the normal symbol lottery, shorten the normal symbol variation time, or extend the opening time of the electric tulip 123. In addition, the game control unit 200 holds up to the limit number (for example, four) of the unchangeable amount when the game ball continuously wins the first start port 121 or the second start port 122, or the game ball continues. Thus, the suspension is set up to the limit number (for example, 4) of the unchangeable amount when passing through the gate 124.
Furthermore, the game control unit 200 opens until the special winning opening 125, which is a special electric accessory, satisfies a predetermined condition (for example, 29.5 seconds have passed or 10 game balls have been won) according to the result of the special symbol lottery. Control is performed so that the round in which the state is maintained is repeated a predetermined number of times. Furthermore, the opening / closing operation interval when the special winning opening 125 is opened is controlled.

Further, when the game ball is won in the first start port 121, the second start port 122, the big winning port 125, and the normal winning port 126, the game control unit 200 per game ball according to the place where the game ball has won. The payout control unit 330 is instructed to pay out a predetermined number of prize balls. For example, when a game ball wins the first start port 121, three prize balls, when a game ball wins the second start port 122, four prize balls, and when a game ball wins the big prize port 125, thirteen prizes. When a game ball wins the ball, the normal winning opening 126, an instruction command (command) is sent to the payout control unit 330 so as to pay out 10 prize balls. Even if it is detected that the game ball has passed through the gate 124, the payout control unit 330 is not instructed to pay out the prize ball in conjunction with it.
When the payout control unit 330 pays out a prize ball in accordance with an instruction from the game control unit 200, the game control unit 200 acquires information on the number of prize balls paid out from the payout control unit 330. As a result, the number of prize balls paid out is managed.

As shown in FIG. 3, the game control unit 200 includes a first start port detection unit (first start port switch (SW)) 211 that detects a winning of a game ball to the first start port 121, as shown in FIG. , A second start port detection unit (second start port switch (SW)) 212 that detects a winning of a game ball to the second start port 122, an electric tulip opening / closing unit 213 that opens and closes the electric tulip 123, and the gate 124. A gate detection unit (gate switch (SW)) 214 for detecting the passage of the game ball is connected.
Further, the game control unit 200 has a large winning port detecting unit (large winning port switch (SW)) 215 for detecting a winning of a game ball to the large winning port 125, and the large winning port 125 is inclined to be in a closed state. A large winning opening / closing unit 216 set to the open state and a normal winning opening detecting unit (normal winning opening switch (SW)) 217 for detecting the winning of a game ball to the normal winning opening 126 are connected.

In addition, the game control unit 200 includes a first special symbol hold indicator 218 that displays the number of unreserved reserves that have been won to the first start port 121 during the change of the special symbol within a limit number (for example, four). , A second special symbol hold indicator 219 that displays within the limit the number of non-changed reserves won to the second starting port 122 during the change of the special symbol, and the non-changed display that has passed through the gate 124 during the change of the normal symbol A normal symbol hold indicator 220 for displaying the fluctuation hold amount within the limit number is connected.
Further, the game control unit 200 includes a first special symbol display 221 for displaying a special symbol variation display and a special symbol lottery result performed by winning a game ball in the first starting port 121, and a second starting port. The second special symbol display 222 that displays the result of the special symbol variation display and special symbol lottery performed by winning the game ball to 122, and the normal symbol display that displays the normal symbol variation display and the normal symbol lottery result A device 223 and a state indicator 224 for displaying the state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 are connected.

  Then, detection signals detected by the first start port switch 211, the second start port switch 212, the gate switch 214, the big winning port switch 215 and the normal winning port switch 217 are sent to the game control unit 200. In addition, the control signal from the game control unit 200 includes an electric tulip opening / closing unit 213, a prize winning opening / closing unit 216, a first special symbol hold indicator 218, a second special symbol hold indicator 219, a normal symbol hold indicator 220, It is sent to the first special symbol display 221, the second special symbol display 222, the normal symbol display 223, and the status display 224. Thereby, the game control unit 200 performs various controls related to the number of payout prize balls.

  Further, a board external information terminal board 350 for transmitting various information to a host computer (not shown) installed in the hall is connected to the game control unit 200. Then, the game control unit 200 transmits the information about the number of paid-out prize balls acquired from the payout control unit 330 and the information indicating the state of the game control unit 200 to the host computer via the board external information terminal board 350. To do.

[Configuration and function of production control unit]
The effect control unit 300 includes a CPU 301 that performs arithmetic processing for controlling effects, a ROM 302 that stores programs executed by the CPU 301 and various data, a RAM 303 that is used as a work memory of the CPU 301, and the like. And a real-time clock (RTC) 304 for measuring.
The effect control unit 300 sets the contents of the effect, for example, based on the determination result of whether or not the winning in the special symbol lottery sent from the game control unit 200 and the variation pattern. At that time, in response to an operation input from the user using the effect button 161 or the effect key 162, the effect content corresponding to the operation input may be set. In this case, for example, a signal (operation signal) corresponding to an operation is received from a controller (not shown) such as the effect button 161, and the operation content identified by the operation signal is reflected in the setting of the effect.
In addition, when the game is interrupted for a predetermined period, the effect control unit 300 instructs the setting of the screen display for waiting for a customer as one of the effects.
Furthermore, the effect control unit 300 sets the effect contents based on the change information of the high probability state and the low probability state received from the game control unit 200, and the change information of the timeless state and the timeless state.
In addition, the effect control unit 300 sends a command for instructing execution of the set effect contents to the image / sound control unit 310 and the lamp control unit 320.

[Configuration / Function of Image / Sound Control Unit]
The image / sound control unit 310 is a CPU 311 that performs arithmetic processing for controlling the image and sound representing the content of the effect, a ROM 312 that stores programs executed by the CPU 311, various data, and the like. And a RAM 313 used as a memory or the like.
Then, the image / sound control unit 310 controls the image displayed on the image display unit 114 and the sound output from the speaker 156 based on the command sent from the effect control unit 300.
Specifically, in the ROM 312 of the image / sound control unit 310, a symbol image or background image displayed during the game on the image display unit 114, a decorative symbol for notifying the player of the lottery result, and a notice effect for the player Image data such as a character or item for displaying is stored.
The ROM 312 further stores various types of acoustic data such as music and sound output from the speaker 156 in synchronization with the image data or independently of the image data, and sound effects such as jingles. The CPU 311 selects and reads out the data corresponding to the command sent from the effect control unit 300 from the image data and the sound data stored in the ROM 312. Furthermore, image processing for background image display, symbol image display, symbol image variation, character / item display, etc., and voice processing using the read acoustic data are performed using the read image data.
Then, the image / sound control unit 310 controls screen display on the image display unit 114 based on the image data subjected to image processing. Further, the sound output from the speaker 156 is controlled by the sound data subjected to the sound processing.

[Configuration and function of lamp control unit]
The lamp control unit 320 stores a CPU 321 that performs arithmetic processing when controlling the light emission of the panel lamp 116 and the frame lamp 157 and the operation of the movable accessory 115, and programs executed by the CPU 321 and various data. A ROM 322 and a RAM 323 used as a working memory for the CPU 321 are provided.
The lamp control unit 320 controls lighting / flashing of the panel lamp 116 and the frame lamp 157, the emission color, and the like based on the command sent from the effect control unit 300. Further, the operation of the movable accessory 115 is controlled.
Specifically, the ROM 322 of the lamp control unit 320 stores lighting / flashing pattern data and emission color pattern data (emission pattern) for the panel lamp 116 and the frame lamp 157 according to the production contents set by the production control unit 300. Data) is stored. The CPU 321 selects and reads out the light emission pattern data stored in the ROM 322 corresponding to the command sent from the effect control unit 300. The lamp controller 320 controls the light emission of the panel lamp 116 and the frame lamp 157 based on the read light emission pattern data.
The ROM 322 of the lamp control unit 320 stores operation pattern data of the movable accessory 115 corresponding to the production content set by the production control unit 300. The CPU 321 controls the operation of the movable accessory 115 based on the read operation pattern data.

[Configuration and function of payout control unit]
The payout control unit 330 is a CPU 331 that performs arithmetic processing when controlling payout of payout balls, a ROM 332 that stores programs executed by the CPU 331, various data, and the like, and a RAM 333 that is used as a work memory of the CPU 331. And.
The payout control unit 330 controls payout of the payout ball based on the command sent from the game control unit 200.
Specifically, the payout control unit 330 acquires, from the game control unit 200, a command for paying out a predetermined number of prize balls according to the place where the game ball has won (the first start port 121 or the like). Then, the payout driving unit 334 is controlled so as to pay out the number of prize balls specified by the command. Here, the payout drive unit 334 is constituted by a drive motor that sends out the game ball from the game ball storage unit.

The payout control unit 330 includes a payout ball detection unit 335 that detects the number of prize balls actually paid out from the game ball storage unit by the payout driving unit 334, and a game ball in the storage unit (not shown). Detecting unit 336 for detecting presence / absence of storage of the game, and detecting whether or not the plate 153 for holding the game ball used when the player plays the game or the paid-out prize ball is full. A full tank detection unit 337 is connected. The payout control unit 330 receives the detection signals detected by the payout ball detection unit 335, the ball presence detection unit 336, and the full tank detection unit 337, and performs a predetermined process according to these detection signals.
Further, the payout control unit 330 is connected to a frame external information terminal board 340 that transmits various types of information to a host computer installed in the hall. Then, the payout control unit 330, for example, information on the number of prize balls instructed to pay out to the payout driving unit 334, information on the number of prize balls actually paid out detected by the payout ball detection unit 335, etc. Is transmitted to the host computer via the frame external information terminal board 340. Also, similar information is transmitted to the game control unit 200.

[Functional configuration of game control unit]
Next, the functional configuration of the game control unit 200 will be described.
FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing a functional configuration of the game control unit 200. As shown in FIG. 4, the game control unit 200 includes a random number acquisition unit 231, a normal symbol determination unit 232, a special symbol variation control unit 233, and a special symbol determination unit 234 as functional units that execute various lottery processes. And a normal symbol fluctuation control unit 236.
In addition, the game control unit 200 includes a variation pattern selection unit 235 as a functional unit that executes a process associated with special symbol variation.
In addition, the game control unit 200 is a function unit that executes operation control of various types of objects and data processing related to a prize ball, etc. As a function unit, a prize winning opening operation control unit 237, an electric tulip operation control unit 238, and a prize ball processing unit 239 are provided. And an output control unit 240 and a random number control unit 241.

The random number acquisition unit 231 acquires a random number related to a special symbol when a game ball wins the first start port 121 or the second start port 122. Specifically, one numerical value (random number value) is selected (obtained) from a predetermined range of numerical values and used for determination by the special symbol determination unit 234.
The random number acquisition unit 231 acquires a random number related to a normal symbol when a game ball passes through the gate 124. Specifically, one numerical value (random number value) is selected (obtained) from a predetermined range of numerical values, and used for determination by the normal symbol determination unit 232.
The special symbol fluctuation control unit 233 controls the fluctuation of the special symbol according to the lottery result when the special symbol lottery is performed.

  The special symbol determination unit 234 uses a random number table as shown in FIG. 17 at the start of the variation of the special symbol, and the lottery result is “whether it is a big hit”, “a type of big hit when winning a big win”, “ It is determined whether or not the jackpot is lost or not when the jackpot is not won. That is, the random number acquisition unit 231 acquires a random number value related to a special symbol when the first starting port switch 211 or the second starting port switch 212 serving as a detection unit detects passage of a game ball, and determines a special symbol. The unit 234 determines based on the acquired random number value whether or not to play a special game (such as a big hit game) advantageous to the player. The special symbol lottery (big hit lottery) described above refers to processing in the random number acquisition unit 231 and the special symbol determination unit 234.

  Here, the “hit” is divided into a plurality of types according to the gaming state that occurs after the end of the jackpot game. Specifically, the type of jackpot is determined depending on the combination of the short-time state or the short-time state and the high-probability state or the low-probability state. In other words, the type of jackpot based on the gaming state that occurs after the end of the jackpot game is a jackpot that becomes a high probability short-time gaming state having both a short-time state and a high-probability state after the jackpot game ends (hereinafter, high probability A jackpot that becomes a low probability short-game state with both a short-time state and a low-probability state (hereinafter, a jackpot of a low-probability short-game state), both a short-time non-state state and a high-probability state A jackpot that becomes a low probability short-time non-game state that has both a short-time no-game state and a low-probability state that has both a short-time and low-probability state There is a possibility of a jackpot of probable short gameless state). Each of these jackpots is associated with an individual special symbol, and the type of jackpot is determined according to the type of special symbol won in the special symbol lottery.

  In addition, the “bonanza” may be divided into a jackpot that can be expected to pay out a large amount of gaming balls for a long time, and a jackpot that can hardly be expected to pay out gaming balls because the jackpot game time is short. The former is called “long hit” and the latter is called “short hit”. For example, in “long win”, a round that is maintained until the open state of the grand prize opening 125 satisfies a predetermined condition (for example, 29.5 seconds have passed or 10 game balls have been won) is repeated a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times). It is. In the “short win”, a round in which the special winning opening 125 is opened for a certain time (for example, 0.1 second) is repeated a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times).

In addition, in the case of “small winning” when the big winning is not won, for example, a small winning game is performed in which the big winning opening 125 is opened for a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times) for 0.1 seconds. At the time of winning the small hit, the game state before the small win is continued even after the small hit game is completed. That is, when the game state at the time of winning the small hit is the high probability short game state, the high probability short time gaming state is continued even after the small hit game ends, and the gaming state does not shift. Similarly, when the gaming state at the time of winning the small hit is the low probability short non-game state, the low probability short non-game state is continued even after the small hit game ends, and the gaming state does not shift.
Further, “small hit” is a kind of “out of game”, and none of the above gaming states that are advantageous to the player is set.

The variation pattern selection unit 235 selects a variation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 221 or the second special symbol display 222. Here, the variation pattern selection unit 235 determines the variation pattern based on the determination result whether or not to play the jackpot game, the determination result whether or not to reach, and the like. Then, based on the variation pattern selected by the variation pattern selection unit 235, the special symbol variation control unit 233 controls the variation of the special symbol. Details of operations of the fluctuation pattern selection unit 235 and the special symbol fluctuation control unit 233 will be described later.
Here, “reach” is an effect for causing a player to expect a big hit in a decorative pattern to be described later.

When the normal symbol lottery is performed, the normal symbol determination unit 232 determines whether the normal symbol lottery result is “winning or not”.
The normal symbol fluctuation control unit 236 controls the fluctuation of the normal symbol in accordance with the normal symbol lottery result.
The electric tulip operation control unit 238 opens the electric tulip 123 for a specified time and a specified number of times when it is determined to be “winning” by the normal symbol lottery, and the game ball can be easily won at the second start port 122. Generate a state. Further, when it is determined as “displacement”, such an open state of the electric tulip 123 is not generated.

The special winning opening operation control unit 237 controls the opening operation of the special winning opening 125.
The prize ball processing unit 239 sets commands for controlling the number of prizes received for various types of winning-related items and lottery, and for controlling the payout of prize balls according to the prizes.
The output control unit 240 controls the output of control commands from the game control unit 200 to the effect control unit 300 and the payout control unit 330.
The random number control unit 241 controls updating of various random number values used in processing by the main control unit.

  Note that the pachinko gaming machine 100 according to the present embodiment includes a second grand prize opening 127 as shown in FIG. The control of the second big prize opening 127 is basically the same as the big prize opening 125. For example, the game control unit 200 controls the opening pattern in which the second big prize opening 127 is opened according to the result of the special symbol lottery. And in this Embodiment, when a ball game ball enters the 2nd big winning opening 127, it is comprised so that it may transfer to a predetermined | prescribed game state after completion | finish of a big hit game. Specifically, when a game ball enters the second grand prize opening 127, the present embodiment is set to shift to a high probability state. It should be noted that the predetermined game state to be shifted to after the jackpot game is finished when winning the second big prize opening 127 is not limited to the high probability state, and may be set to, for example, a short time state. Further, a special prize opening is provided inside the second big prize opening 127, and when a game ball enters the special prize opening, the game is shifted to a predetermined gaming state after the big hit game is over. You may do it.

[Basic operation of gaming machine]
Next, the basic operation of the pachinko gaming machine 100 will be described.
When the power is turned on, the game control unit 200 of the pachinko gaming machine 100 performs initialization and initial setting of various devices as a basic process at the time of activation. And after performing a basic process, the game control part 200 repeatedly performs the main control process which is a series of processes regarding progress of a game. In addition, when the power is shut off, the game control unit 200 executes a series of power-off processing.

FIG. 5A is a flowchart illustrating an operation of basic processing by the game control unit 200.
When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned on, the game control unit 200 first permits access to the RAM 203 (see FIG. 3) (step (hereinafter, “step” will be referred to as “S”) 101). Then, the game control unit 200 determines whether or not a RAM clear switch for clearing the RAM 203 is ON (S102).
If the RAM clear switch is OFF (No in S102), the game control unit 200 next determines whether or not the backup flag relating to the operation at the time of power-off is ON (S103).
If the backup flag is ON (Yes in S103), the game control unit 200 next determines whether or not the checksum created when the power is turned off is normal (S104).
If the checksum is normal (Yes in S104), the game control unit 200 next executes a return process (S105). In this return process, the game control unit 200 performs setting of the sub-control means such as the effect control unit 300 accompanying the return from the state where the power is cut off. Specifically, the game control unit 200 is configured so that the internal state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 when the power is cut off (whether the game is a big hit game, either a high probability state or a low probability state, a short time state and a short time state) The command for setting the sub-control means is output to the effect control unit 300 so that any one of them is reflected. In this return process, the game control unit 200 turns off the backup flag.

  On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch is ON (Yes in S102), the backup flag is OFF (No in S103), and the checksum is abnormal (No in S104), then the game control unit 200 is initialized. As processing, the stored contents of the RAM 203 are cleared (S106), and the work area of the RAM 203 is set (S107). Then, the game control unit 200 outputs a command for setting (initializing) the sub control means to the effect control unit 300, and sets the sub board (sub control means) (S108). The setting of the sub board includes clearing the RAMs 303, 313, and 323 mounted on each sub board.

After the return process (see S105) is completed or after the setting of the sub-board (see S108) is finished, the game control unit 200 sets various counters and timers used for game control (S109). Then, the game control unit 200 determines whether or not the interrupt permission (S110), the interrupt prohibition (S111), the symbol random number control process (S112), the initial value random number update process (S113), and the power shutoff flag are ON. (S114) is repeatedly executed as a loop process.
Here, interrupt permission (S110) and interrupt prohibition (S111) are provided to enable execution of interrupt processing during execution of the loop processing (S110 to S114). In the present embodiment, main control processing in game control is executed by this interrupt processing. Details of the main control process will be described later.
In the symbol random number control process (S112), the game control unit 200 updates the variation pattern random number used in the special symbol lottery.
In the initial value random number update process (S113), the game control unit 200 updates initial values of various random number values used in the game control.
In the determination of the power cut-off flag, when the power cut-off flag is OFF (No in S114), the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is not cut off, and the game control unit 200 performs main control by interruption together with the loop processing (S110 to S114). Repeat the process. On the other hand, when the power shut-off flag is ON (Yes in S114), the game control unit 200 starts a process for shutting off the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 (power shut-off process).

FIG. 5B is a flowchart illustrating the operation of power-off processing by the game control unit 200.
In the power-off process, the game control unit 200 first clears the setting of the output port for performing various outputs (S115). Next, the game control unit 200 creates a checksum and stores it in the RAM 203 (S116). Next, the game control unit 200 turns on the backup flag (S117), prohibits access to the RAM 203 (S118), and shifts to an infinite loop.

[Main control processing of gaming machines]
Next, main control processing of the pachinko gaming machine 100 will be described.
In the main control process, the game control unit 200 controls the game in the pachinko gaming machine 100, instructs the effect control unit 300, which is a sub-control means, to control the effect, and gives a prize ball to the payout control unit 330. Instructs payout control.

FIG. 5-3 is a flowchart showing main control processing of the game control unit 200.
The main control process includes a series of processes in game control, and is repeatedly executed at predetermined time intervals (for example, 4 milliseconds). In the present embodiment, the game control unit 200 generates an interrupt every predetermined time set in advance, and when the interrupt is permitted in the loop process shown in FIG. Execute main control processing. As shown in FIG. 7, in the main control process, a random number update process, a switch process, a symbol process, an electric accessory process, a prize ball process, and an output process are sequentially executed (S501 to S506).

  In the random number update process (S501), the game control unit 200 calls a function (subroutine) of the random number control unit 241, and updates various random number values used in the game control by the game control unit 200. Details of the setting of the random number and the update of the random value will be described later.

As the switch process (S502), a start port switch process and a gate switch process are performed.
In the start port switch process, the game control unit 200 calls the function (subroutine) of the random number acquisition unit 231, monitors the states of the first start port switch 211 and the second start port switch 212 in FIG. If this happens, a special symbol lottery process is executed.
In the gate switch process, the game control unit 200 calls the function (subroutine) of the normal symbol determination unit 232, monitors the state of the gate switch 214 in FIG. 3, and for the normal symbol lottery when the switch is turned on. Execute the process.
The detailed contents of these switch processes will be described later.

As the symbol processing (S503), special symbol processing and normal symbol processing are performed.
In the special symbol process, the game control unit 200 calls the functions (subroutines) of the special symbol variation control unit 233, the special symbol determination unit 234, and the variation pattern selection unit 235, and executes the special symbol variation and the process associated with this symbol variation. To do.
In the normal symbol process, the game control unit 200 calls a function (subroutine) of the normal symbol variation control unit 236, and executes a normal symbol variation and a process associated with the symbol variation.
The detailed contents of these symbol processes will be described later.

As the electric accessory process (S504), a big prize opening process and an electric tulip process are performed.
In the special prize opening process, the game control unit 200 calls a function (subroutine) of the special prize opening operation control unit 237 and controls the opening operation of the special prize opening 125 based on a predetermined condition.
In the electric tulip process, the game control unit 200 calls a function (subroutine) of the electric tulip operation control unit 238 and controls the opening operation of the electric tulip 123 based on a predetermined condition.
The detailed contents of these electric accessory processing will be described later.

  In the winning ball process (S505), the game control unit 200 calls a function (subroutine) of the winning ball processing unit 239, and sets a command for controlling the number of winnings and a control for paying out a winning ball according to the winnings.

  In the output process (S506), the game control unit 200 calls a function (subroutine) of the output control unit 240, outputs a command for effect control to the effect control unit 300, and sends a command for payout control to the payout control unit 330. Output. The effect control command is generated in each processing from S502 to S504, and stored (set) in the control command storage area provided in the RAM 203. The payout control command is generated in the processing of S 505 and stored (set) in the control command storage area provided in the RAM 203. A storage area is set in the RAM 203 for each type of control command.

  The output control unit 240 sequentially checks the storage area of each control command in the RAM 203, and if the control command is stored in each storage area (that is, the control command is generated in the processing of S502 to S505). The control command is read out and output to the output destination (production control unit 300 or payout control unit 330).

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 5C, output processing is performed at the end of a series of main control processing. That is, the command generated in each process of S502 to S505 by the above functions as the first processing means is stored in a corresponding storage area of the RAM 203 in each process. After these processes, the output control unit 240 as a second processing unit collectively outputs the commands generated in each process accumulated in the storage area of the RAM 203. In other words, in this embodiment, when the main control process is executed for one cycle, the command generated in the execution of the one cycle is output after the last command generation in the execution of the one cycle is performed.

[Modified example of basic operation of gaming machine]
In the operation example described with reference to FIGS. 5A to 5C, the interrupt is permitted in the loop process portion of the basic process, and the main control process including a series of processes is executed as the interrupt process. However, the main control process only needs to be configured to be repeatedly executed at regular intervals, and specific implementation means (execution procedure) is not limited to the examples shown in FIGS. It is not limited. For example, the main control process may be incorporated in a series of operations of the basic process, the elapsed time may be measured at a predetermined timing, and the process may return to the main control process every predetermined time (for example, 4 milliseconds). In addition, while incorporating the main control process in the series of operations of the basic process, as in the operation described with reference to FIG. 5A to FIG. If it occurs, it may be configured to return to the main control process incorporated in the basic process.
When a command generated by basic processing is output, in principle, every time a command is generated, the command is stored in the command storage area of the RAM 203, and the function of the output control unit 240 as the second processing means is called. Output. The basic process is a special process such as an initial operation that is performed when the power is turned on, and the processing procedure may vary depending on conditions such as the state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 when the power is turned on. This is to promptly output the generated command so that there is no such thing. In addition, when a command is continuously generated by a plurality of related processes, a process procedure for storing a plurality of commands in the command storage area of the RAM 203 and outputting them in response to a specific process request is adopted. May be.

[Start-up switch processing in game control unit]
FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing the contents of the start port switch process in the switch process shown in S502 of FIG. 5-3.
In the start port switch process, a process for winning at the first start port 121 and a process for winning at the second start port 122 are sequentially performed. Referring to FIG. 6, the game control unit 200 first determines whether or not a game ball is won at the first start port 121 and the first start port switch 211 is turned on (S601). If the first start port switch 211 is turned on, the game control unit 200 next determines whether or not the unchanged hold number U1 in the winning of the first start port 121 is less than the upper limit value (S602). . In the example shown in FIG. 6, the upper limit value is four. If the number of holds U1 has reached the upper limit (No in S602), it is not possible to hold any more unchanging winnings, so the process for winning at the first start port 121 is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the hold number U1 is less than the upper limit value (Yes in S602), the game control unit 200 next adds 1 to the value of the hold number U1 (S603). And the random number acquisition part 231 of the game control part 200 acquires the random value for the lottery by this time winning, and stores it in RAM203 (S604). Here, since the first starting port 121 is won, a random number value for special symbol lottery is acquired. The random value acquired at this time is a value updated by the random number update process of S501. Then, the result of the special symbol lottery is determined in the later special symbol processing by this random number value. Random numbers here include jackpot random numbers that determine jackpot, jackpot or loss, jackpot type (short or short state after the end of jackpot game, short or short state, high probability state and low probability state, long hit, short Symbol random number value that determines the winning pattern, jackpot symbol random number value, fluctuation pattern random number value for specifying the variation pattern in symbol variation, reach random number value that determines whether or not to perform with reach in the event of a loss, etc. Is included.

Next, the game control unit 200 performs a pre-determination process for giving a notice effect of a lottery result to a winning ball (holding ball) for which a special symbol variation display operation is pending (that is, an undrawn lottery). (S605). In this preliminary determination process, the lottery result is determined not at the start of symbol variation but at the start opening prize (that is, in S605). In addition, in the gaming machine that does not perform the notice effect based on the advance determination, the advance determination process may be omitted.
Thereafter, the game control unit 200 sets a hold number increase command for notifying the effect control unit 300 of the increase in the hold number U1 in S603 in the RAM 203 (S606), and ends the process for winning in the first start port 121. To do. When the advance determination process of S605 is performed, the information on the determination result of the advance determination obtained in S605 is included in the pending number increase command.

  Next, a process for winning in the second start port 122 is performed. Referring to FIG. 6, next, the game control unit 200 determines whether or not the game ball has won the second start port 122 and the second start port switch 212 is turned on (S607). If the second start port switch 212 is turned ON, the game control unit 200 next determines whether or not the unchanged hold number U2 in the winning of the second start port 122 is less than the upper limit value (S608). . In the example shown in FIG. 6, the upper limit value is four. If the number of holds U2 has reached the upper limit (No in S608), it is not possible to hold any more unchanging winnings, and the process for winning at the second start port 122 is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the holding number U2 is less than the upper limit value (Yes in S608), the game control unit 200 adds 1 to the value of the holding number U2 (S609). And the random number acquisition part 231 of the game control part 200 acquires the random value for the lottery by this prize-winning, and stores it in RAM203 (S610). Here, since the winning of the second start port 122 is won, random numbers for special symbol lottery (big hit random number value, big hit symbol random number value, reach random number value, fluctuation pattern random number value, etc.) are acquired as in S604 above. Is done. The random value acquired at this time is a value updated by the random number update process of S501. Then, the result of the special symbol lottery is determined in the later special symbol processing by this random number value.

Next, the game control unit 200 performs a pre-determination process for giving a notice effect of a lottery result to a winning ball (holding ball) for which a special symbol variation display operation is pending (that is, an undrawn lottery). (S611). The content of this pre-determination process is the same as that of said S605. This prior determination process may also be omitted in a gaming machine that does not perform a notice effect based on prior determination.
Thereafter, the game control unit 200 sets a hold number increase command for notifying the effect control unit 300 of the increase in the hold number U2 in S609 in the RAM 203 (S612), and finishes the process for winning at the second start port 122. To do. When the advance determination process of S611 is performed, the information on the determination result of the advance determination obtained in S611 is included in the pending number increase command.

[Gate switch processing in game control unit]
FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing the contents of the gate switch process when a game ball passes through the gate 124.
In this gate switch process, the game control unit 200 first determines whether or not the game ball has passed through the gate 124 and the gate switch 214 is turned on (S701). If the gate switch 214 is turned on, the game control unit 200 next determines whether or not the unchanged holding number G is less than the upper limit value (S702). In the example shown in FIG. 7, the upper limit value is four. If the number of reserves G has reached the upper limit (No in S702), no more unchanging winnings can be reserved, and the gate switch processing is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the number of reservations G is less than the upper limit value (Yes in S702), the game control unit 200 then adds 1 to the value of the number of reservations G (S703). And the random number acquisition part 231 of the game control part 200 acquires the random value for the lottery by this time winning, and stores it in RAM203 (S704). Here, since the gate 124 is won, a random number value (such as a winning random number value) for normal symbol lottery is acquired.

  After the random value is acquired in S704, the game control unit 200 sets a hold number G increase command for notifying the effect control unit 300 of the increase in the hold number G in S703 in the RAM 203 (S705). The process for winning is completed.

[Special symbol processing in game control unit]
FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special symbol processing in the symbol processing shown in S503 of FIG. 5-3.
In this special symbol process, the special symbol variation control unit 233 of the game control unit 200 first checks whether or not the winning game flag is ON in the setting of a flag set in the RAM 203 (hereinafter, flag setting) ( S801). Here, the winning game flag is a flag that is set to identify that the result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit. Either the long winning game flag or the short winning game flag is set according to the type of winning. In the present embodiment, these are collectively called a winning game flag.

  When the winning game flag is ON, since the pachinko gaming machine 100 is already in a big hit, the special symbol processing is terminated without starting the special symbol variation (Yes in S801). On the other hand, if the winning game flag is OFF (No in S801), then the special symbol variation control unit 233 determines whether or not the current state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in the special symbol variation (S802). If the special symbol is not changing (No in S802), then the special symbol fluctuation control unit 233 performs processing related to the number U1 and U2 (see FIG. 6) of the special symbols that have not been changed (S803 to S806). In the present embodiment, the number of holds U1 related to winning of the first start port 121 and the number of holds U2 related to winning of the second start port 122 are distinguished, so this processing is also performed for each corresponding start port. .

  Specifically, the special symbol variation control unit 233 first determines whether or not the number of holds U2 related to winning in the second start port 122 is 1 or more (S803). When the number of reservations U2 is 1 or more (Yes in S803), the special symbol variation control unit 233 subtracts 1 from the value of the number of reservations U2 (S804). On the other hand, if the holding number U2 = 0 (No in S803), the special symbol variation control unit 233 next determines whether the holding number U1 related to winning in the first start port 121 is 1 or more (S805). When the number of holds U1 is 1 or more (Yes in S805), the special symbol variation control unit 233 subtracts 1 from the value of the number of holds U1 (S806). On the other hand, if the holding number U1 = 0 (No in S805), it means that there is no winning for starting the special symbol lottery, so the special symbol change is not started, and the waiting process for waiting for customers set in another routine To finish the process (S816).

  After subtracting the reserved number U1 or the reserved number U2 in S804 or S806, the special symbol variation control unit 233 turns off the customer waiting flag set in the flag setting of the RAM 203 (S807). The customer waiting flag is a flag for identifying that the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in the customer waiting state, and is set in the customer waiting setting process (S816, see FIG. 12).

  Next, the special symbol variation control unit 233 executes jackpot determination processing and variation pattern selection processing by separate routines (S808, S809). As will be described in detail later, by the jackpot determination process and the variation pattern selection process, setting information for variation of the special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 221 (a jackpot symbol, a gaming state, a variation pattern, etc.) is determined. Is done. These pieces of information are included in a change start command sent to the effect control unit 300.

  Thereafter, the special symbol variation control unit 233 is displayed by the first special symbol display unit 221 and the second special symbol display unit 222 shown in FIG. 2 based on the setting contents determined in the jackpot determination process and the variation pattern selection process. The special symbol change is started (S810). Then, a change start command including setting information (a jackpot symbol, a gaming state, a change pattern, etc.) indicating the setting contents is generated and set in the RAM 203 (S811). The change start command set in S811 is transmitted to the effect control unit 300 by the output process shown in S506 of FIG.

  When it is determined in S802 that the special symbol is changing (Yes in S802), or after the change start command is set in S811, the special symbol variation control unit 233 determines whether or not the variation time has elapsed (S812). ). That is, it is determined whether or not the elapsed time since the start of the variation of the special symbol in S810 has reached the variation time set in the variation pattern selection process in S809. If the variation time has not elapsed (No in S812), the special symbol variation is continued, and the special symbol processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, when the variation time has elapsed (Yes in S812), the special symbol variation control unit 233 first determines the variation of the special symbol in the first special symbol display 221 and the second special symbol display 222 as a big hit determination process in S808. It stops at the symbol determined in (S813). A change stop command for stopping a decorative design, which will be described later, is set in the RAM 203 (S814). Then, a stop routine process of another routine is executed (S815). The contents of the stop process will be described later. The change stop command set in S814 is transmitted to the effect control unit 300 by the output process shown in S506 of FIG.

[Big hit judgment processing by game control unit]
FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot determination process (S808 in FIG. 8).
In this jackpot determination process, the special symbol determination unit 234 of the game control unit 200 first determines a jackpot random number value in the current special symbol lottery (S901), and determines whether or not the jackpot or small hit is made (S902). , S905). Whether or not the jackpot or the jackpot is determined is whether or not the value of the jackpot random number acquired in S604 or S610 in FIG. 6 matches the value set as the jackpot winning value or the value set as the jackpot winning value It is determined by judging whether or not (see FIG. 17A).

  If the result of the random number determination in S901 is a big hit (Yes in S902), then the special symbol determination unit 234 determines a big hit symbol random number value (S903). Depending on the result of this determination, the type of jackpot (high or low probability state, short or short state, short or short state, long or short hit) is determined. Which jackpot is determined is determined by whether the value of the jackpot symbol random number acquired in S604 or S610 in FIG. 6 matches a preset value for each jackpot type (FIG. 17 ( b)).

  After the above determination, the special symbol determination unit 234 sets a symbol representing the type of jackpot determined by the determination of the jackpot symbol random number (the jackpot symbol) as setting information in the RAM 203 (S904).

  If the result of the random number determination in S901 is a small hit (No in S902, Yes in S905), then the special symbol determination unit 234 uses a symbol representing the small hit (hereinafter referred to as a small hit symbol) as setting information. It is set in the RAM 203 (S906).

  If the result of the random number determination in S901 is neither big win nor small win (No in S902 and S905), then the special symbol determination unit 234 uses the symbol indicating that the lottery is lost (hereinafter referred to as a lost symbol) as the setting information in the RAM 203. (S907).

[Change pattern selection process by game control unit]
FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variation pattern selection process (S809 in FIG. 8).
In this variation pattern selection process, the variation pattern selection unit 235 of the game control unit 200 first determines whether or not a big win has been won in the current special symbol lottery using the determination result in S902 of the jackpot determination process (FIG. 9). (S1001). If it is a big hit (Yes in S1001), the fluctuation pattern selection unit 235 reads the big hit fluctuation pattern table from the ROM 202 and sets it in the RAM 203 (S1002).

On the other hand, if the jackpot has not been won (No in S1001), the variation pattern selection unit 235 then determines a random value for determining whether or not to perform a so-called reach effect for causing the player to expect a jackpot. (S1003). Whether or not the reach effect is performed is determined by determining whether or not the reach random number value acquired in S604 or S610 in FIG. 6 matches a preset value (see FIG. 17C). .
As a result of the determination using the random number value, when the reach effect is performed (Yes in S1004), the variation pattern selection unit 235 reads the variation pattern table for reach from the ROM 202 and sets it in the RAM 203 (S1005). When the reach effect is not performed (No in S1004), the variation pattern selection unit 235 reads the variation pattern table for detachment from the ROM 202 and sets it in the RAM 203 (S1006).
Here, the variation pattern table is a table in which a plurality of variation patterns (variation times 10 seconds, 30 seconds, 60 seconds, 90 seconds, etc.) prepared in advance are associated with values of variation pattern random numbers.

  Next, the variation pattern selection unit 235 determines the variation pattern random value using the variation pattern random value acquired in S604 or S610 of FIG. 6 and the variation pattern table set in S1002, 1005, and 1006 (S1007). ). That is, the fluctuation pattern selection unit 235 refers to the fluctuation pattern table set in the RAM 203 and selects a fluctuation pattern corresponding to the random value of the fluctuation pattern random number. Therefore, even if the same random number value is acquired, the variation referred to depending on the state difference such as whether or not the result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit or not and whether or not a reach effect is performed if it is not a big hit Since the pattern table is different, the determined variation pattern is different.

  Thereafter, the variation pattern selection unit 235 sets the variation pattern selected in S1007 in the RAM 203 as setting information (S1008). The setting information of the variation pattern set in S1008 is included in the variation start command set in S811 of FIG. 8, and is transmitted to the effect control unit 300 by the output process shown in S506 of FIG. Details of the variation pattern selected in this embodiment and its setting will be described later.

[Processing during stop by game control unit]
FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the contents of the suspension process (S815 in FIG. 8).
In the stop process, the game control unit 200 first checks whether or not a flag indicating that the time is short (hereinafter referred to as a short time flag) is ON in the flag setting of the RAM 203 (S1101). When the time reduction flag is ON (Yes in S1101), the game control unit 200 subtracts 1 from the value of the number of lotteries (number of fluctuations) J in the time reduction state (S1102), and whether or not the number of lotteries J has become zero. (S1103). If the number of lotteries J = 0 (Yes in S1103), the time reduction flag is turned OFF (S1104). It should be noted that the operation for turning on the hourly flag and the setting of the initial value of the lottery number J are performed in a game state setting process (FIG. 15) in a special winning opening process (FIG. 14) described later.

  If the time reduction flag is OFF (No in S1101), or after the time reduction flag is turned OFF in S1104, or if the value of the lottery count J is not 0 (No in S1103), the game control unit 200 next stores the value in the RAM 203. It is checked whether or not a flag indicating the high probability state in the flag setting (hereinafter, probability variation flag) is ON (S1105). When both the probability variation flag and the previous time-short flag are ON, the high-probability short-time gaming state is established, and when the probability variation flag is ON and the time-short flag is OFF, the high-probability time-short no-game state.

  When the probability variation flag is ON (Yes in S1105), the game control unit 200 subtracts 1 from the value of the number of lotteries (number of variations) X in the high probability state (S1106), and whether or not the number of lotteries X has become 0. (S1107). If the number of lotteries X = 0 (Yes in S1107), the probability variation flag is turned OFF (S1108). Note that the operation for turning on the probability change flag and the setting of the initial value of the lottery number X are performed in a game state setting process (FIG. 15) in a special prize opening process (FIG. 14) described later.

  If the probability change flag is OFF (No in S1105), or after the probability change flag is turned OFF in S1108, or if the value of the lottery count X is not 0 (No in S1107), the game control unit 200 next It is determined whether or not a special symbol lottery has been won (S1109). If it is a big hit (Yes in S1109), the game control unit 200 next determines whether or not the big hit type is a long win (S1110).

  Here, the determination of whether or not the jackpot is possible can be made based on the determination result of the jackpot determination process (FIG. 9). For example, if any of the symbols shown in the diagram of FIG. 17B to be described later is set, “Yes” is determined in S1109. If a lost symbol or a small bonus symbol is set in the RAM 203 by the big hit determination process, No in S1109.

  When the jackpot type is a long hit (Yes in S1110), the game control unit 200 turns on the long hit game flag (S1111). Thereby, the setting of the gaming state in the RAM 203 becomes a jackpot gaming state (long winning gaming state) in which the jackpot type is long winning. In addition, here, in the long hit, it is not distinguished whether it is a high probability state or a low probability state. Whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state is specified by turning on a corresponding flag in a game state setting process (FIG. 15) in a special prize opening process (FIG. 14) described later.

  If the jackpot type is not long hit (No in S1110), the game control unit 200 turns on the short hit game flag (S1112). Thereby, the setting of the gaming state in the RAM 203 becomes a big hit gaming state (short winning gaming state) in which the big hit type is short hit. Similar to the case of long hit, the case of short hit does not distinguish between a high probability state and a low probability state.

  After turning on the winning game flag in S1111 or S1112, the game control unit 200 initializes the values of the lottery times J and X (S1113). Further, the game control unit 200 turns off the time reduction flag when the time reduction flag is ON in S1101 and the lottery count J is not 0 in S1103 (S1114). Similarly, when the probability variation flag is ON in S1105 and the number of lotteries X is not 0 in S1107, the probability variation flag is turned OFF (S1114).

On the other hand, when the result of the special symbol lottery this time is not a big hit (No in S1109), the game control unit 200 determines whether or not the result of the special symbol lottery this time is a big hit (S1115). If it is not a small hit (No in S1115), the stopped process is terminated.
On the other hand, when it is a small hit (Yes in S1115), the game control unit 200 starts a small hit game (S1116). Thereby, the setting of the gaming state in the RAM 203 becomes the small hit gaming state. In the small hit game, as described above, the special winning opening 125 is opened and closed a predetermined number of times, and is ended after a predetermined time has elapsed.

After initializing the values of the lottery times J and X in S1113, the game control unit 200 starts an opening operation (S1117). Here, the content of the opening operation differs depending on which of S1111 and S1112 the winning game flag is turned on. That is, according to the state of the winning game flag, one of the opening operations set in each gaming state of the long winning game and the short winning game is performed.
Thereafter, the game control unit 200 sets an opening command for performing an effect in the opening operation corresponding to the winning game flag in the effect control unit 300 in the RAM 203 (S1118), and ends the stop process. This opening command is transmitted to the effect control unit 300 in the output process shown in S506 of FIG.

[Customer waiting setting process by game control unit]
FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the contents of the customer waiting setting process (S816 in FIG. 8).
In this customer waiting setting process, the game control unit 200 first checks whether or not the customer waiting flag is ON in the flag setting of the RAM 203 (S1201). Here, the customer waiting flag is a flag that is set to identify that the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in a customer waiting state.

  If the customer waiting flag is ON, the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in a customer waiting state, and thus the processing is terminated as it is (Yes in S1201). On the other hand, when the customer waiting flag is OFF, the game control unit 200 generates a customer waiting command and sets it in the RAM 203 (S1202), and turns on the customer waiting flag (S1203). The customer waiting command set in S1202 is transmitted to the effect control unit 300 by the output process shown in S506 of FIG. The customer waiting flag is set in a state where there is no suspension with the special symbol change stopped.

[Normal symbol processing by game control unit]
FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the contents of the normal symbol processing in the symbol processing shown in S503 of FIG. 5-3.
In this normal symbol process, the normal symbol variation control unit 236 of the game control unit 200 first checks whether or not the auxiliary game flag is ON in the flag setting of the RAM 203 (S1301). Here, the auxiliary game flag is a flag that is set when a normal symbol lottery is won. The state in which the auxiliary game flag is set is a state in which the electric tulip 123 is opened in accordance with the electric tulip process (FIG. 16) described later and it is easy to win the second start port 122 (auxiliary game state).

  When the auxiliary game flag is ON, since the auxiliary game state has already been reached and the normal symbol is stopped, the normal symbol process is terminated without starting the normal symbol variation (Yes in S1301). On the other hand, if the auxiliary game flag is OFF (No in S1301), then the normal symbol variation control unit 236 determines whether or not the current state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in the normal symbol variation (S1302). If the normal symbol is not changing (No in S1302), then the normal symbol variation control unit 236 determines whether the number G of the normal symbol remaining unchanged (see FIG. 7) is 1 or more (S1303). If the holding number G = 0 (No in S1303), it means that there is no winning for starting the normal symbol lottery, and therefore the processing is terminated without starting the normal symbol variation.

  On the other hand, when the reserved number G is 1 or more (Yes in S1303), the normal symbol variation control unit 236 decrements the value of the reserved number G by 1 (S1304), and determines the winning random number in the current normal symbol lottery. To determine whether or not the normal symbol lottery is won (S1305). Whether or not the winner has been won is determined by determining whether or not the value of the winning random number acquired in S704 of FIG. 7 matches the value set as the winning value in the table shown in FIG. It is determined.

  Next, the normal symbol variation control unit 236 sets a normal symbol according to the result of the normal symbol lottery (S1306). That is, when a normal symbol lottery is won, a symbol representing the winning (hereinafter referred to as a winning symbol) is set in the RAM 203 as setting information. On the other hand, when the normal symbol lottery is not won, a symbol indicating that the lottery has been lost (hereinafter referred to as a lost symbol) is set in the RAM 203 as setting information.

  Next, the normal symbol variation control unit 236 sets the variation time of the normal symbol (S1307). This variation time is set based on the time reduction flag set in the processing of S1104 and S1114 in FIG. 11, S1504 and S1507 in FIG. That is, when the time reduction flag is ON in the setting in S1307, it is set to a short time (for example, 1.5 seconds), and when the time reduction flag is OFF, it is set to a long time (for example, 4.0 seconds). Is done. After this setting, the normal symbol fluctuation control unit 236 starts normal symbol fluctuations in the normal symbol display 223 shown in FIGS. 2A and 3 based on the setting contents of S1307 (S1308).

  After starting the change of the normal symbol in S1308 or when it is determined that the normal symbol is changing in S1302 (Yes in S1302), the normal symbol change control unit 236 determines whether or not the change time has passed (S1309). ). That is, it is determined whether or not the elapsed time from the start of the normal symbol variation in S1308 has reached the variation time set in S1307. If the fluctuation time has not elapsed (No in S1309), the normal symbol variation is continued, so that the normal symbol processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, when the fluctuation time is over (Yes in S1309), the normal symbol fluctuation control unit 236 stops the fluctuation of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display unit 223 (S1310). Then, the normal symbol variation control unit 236 determines whether or not the normal symbol lottery is won based on the stopped normal symbol (S1311). If a win is made (Yes in S1311), the auxiliary game flag is turned ON (S1312). On the other hand, if the lottery is off (No in S1311), the normal symbol processing is terminated without turning on the auxiliary game flag.

[Large winning mouth processing by game control unit]
FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the contents of the big prize opening process in the electric accessory process shown in S504 of FIG. 5-3.
In this special winning opening process, the special winning opening operation control unit 237 of the game control unit 200 first checks whether or not the winning game flag is ON in the flag setting of the RAM 203 (S1401). If the winning game flag is OFF, there is no prize winning in the big prize opening 125, and the big prize opening process is terminated (No in S1401). On the other hand, if the winning game flag is ON (Yes in S1401), then the special winning opening operation control unit 237 opens in the operation control at the time of the big hit started by the pachinko gaming machine 100 being stopped (FIG. 11). It is determined whether or not the operation is in progress (S1402).

  When the pachinko gaming machine 100 is opening (Yes in S1402), the next prize opening operation control unit 237 determines whether or not a predetermined time (opening time) for performing the opening operation has elapsed. (S1403). If the opening time has not elapsed, the opening operation at the special winning opening 125 is continued, and the special winning opening process is terminated (No in S1403). On the other hand, if the opening time has elapsed (Yes in S1403), the special winning opening operation control unit 237 then sets the operation of the special winning opening 125 (S1404) and initializes the winning number C (C = 0). Then, the value of the number R of rounds of operation of the big prize opening 125 is incremented by 1 from the current value (S1406), and the big prize opening 125 is started (opened) (S1407).

  In the operation setting of S1404, the operation pattern of the special winning opening 125 and the number of rounds (operation round number) operated by the operation pattern are set. As the case where the big prize opening 125 is operated, there are a case where it is a big win per long or short in a special symbol lottery and a case where it is a small win. The operation pattern and the number of rounds are variously set according to the hit type. As an example, in the case of a long hit, for example, 15 rounds (15R) are operated, and 29.5 seconds are released once in one round. In the case of a short hit, for example, 15 rounds (15R) are operated, and one round is performed once for 0.1 seconds. In the case of a small hit, for example, one round (1R) is operated, and 0.1 second is released 15 times in this round. Here, when the operation with short hits and the operation with small hits are compared in the above examples, both 0.1 seconds of opening is performed 15 times. That is, the action of the big winning opening 125 that can be seen by the player is the same for the case of short win and the case of small win, and the short win and the small win are distinguished only from the action of the big winning opening 125 on the game board 110. I can't do it.

  As another example, 15 rounds (15R) are activated per long, 29.5 seconds are released once per round, 2 rounds (2R) are activated per short, and 0 are rounded per round. .9 seconds are opened twice, and with a small hit, one round (1R) is operated, and 0.9 seconds is opened twice in this round. In this case as well, when the operation with short hits and the operation with small hits are compared, both 0.9 seconds are released twice, and the action of the big prize opening 125 that can be seen by the player is in the case of short hits. It is the same in the case of small hits.

  The law stipulates that the cumulative opening time of the special winning opening 125 must be set within 1.8 seconds for a small hit. On the other hand, in the case of a big hit (long hit or short win), the big winning opening 125 must be continuously opened a plurality of times. Therefore, when trying to make it difficult to visually distinguish the operation with a small hit and the operation with a short hit as described above, within the range that satisfies the cumulative open time within 1.8 seconds in one operation, An operation mode in which the big prize opening 125 is opened two or more times is set, and in the short win, the same number of rounds as the number of small hits is set.

  Next, the special winning opening operation control unit 237 determines whether or not the opening time in the operation pattern set in S1404 has elapsed (S1408). If the open state at the big prize opening 125 has not passed the opening time (No in S1408), the big prize opening operation control unit 237 then sets the number C of winning prizes to the big prize opening 125 to a predetermined number (for example, 9). It is determined whether or not (S1409). When the opening time has not elapsed and the winning number C is less than the specified number, the operation state (opening state) of the large winning opening 125 is continued, so the large winning opening process is terminated (No in S1409). ). On the other hand, if the opening time has elapsed (Yes in S1408) or the winning number C reaches the specified number (Yes in S1409), the special winning opening operation control unit 237 finishes operating the special winning opening 125 (closing). (S1410).

  Next, the special winning opening operation control unit 237 determines whether or not the number R of rounds of operation of the special winning opening 125 has reached the maximum value set in S1404 (S1411). If the maximum value has not been reached, the remaining operations are performed, and the special winning opening process is terminated (No in S1411).

If the number of rounds R of the operation of the special winning opening 125 reaches the maximum value (Yes in S1411), the special winning opening operation control unit 237 then starts an ending operation (S1412). Here, the content of the ending operation corresponds to the state of the winning game flag among the ending operations set in each gaming state of the long winning game and the short winning game.
Thereafter, the special winning opening operation control unit 237 sets an ending command for performing an effect in the ending operation according to the winning game flag in the effect control unit 300 in the RAM 203 (S1413). This ending command is transmitted to the effect control unit 300 in the output process shown in S506 of FIG.

  Next, the special winning opening operation control unit 237 resets the round number R of the operation of the special winning opening 125 to 0 (S1414), and then performs an ending operation in which an elapsed time from the start of the ending operation is set in advance. It is determined whether the power time (ending time) has elapsed (S1417). If the ending time has not elapsed, the ending operation is continued, and thus the big prize opening process is terminated (No in S1417). On the other hand, if the ending time has elapsed (Yes in S1417), the special winning opening operation control unit 237 then performs a game state setting process by the game control unit 200 (S1418), then turns off the winning game flag, The big prize opening process is terminated (S1419). The contents of the game state setting process will be described later.

  If it is determined in S1402 that the pachinko gaming machine 100 is not opening (No in S1402), the special winning opening operation control unit 237 determines whether or not it is ending (S1415). If the ending is in progress (Yes in S1415), the operations after S1417 are executed.

On the other hand, if the pachinko gaming machine 100 is not ending (No in S1415), the special winning opening operation control unit 237 next determines whether or not the special winning opening 125 is operating (opening) (S1416). If it is not in operation (No in S1416), the operation after S1405 is executed. If it is in operation (Yes in S1416), the operation after S1408 is executed.
The effect performed in the small hit game described above is the same as the effect performed in the short hit game, and it is not possible to distinguish short hit and small hit from the effect.

[Game state setting process]
FIG. 15 shows the contents of the game state setting process (S1418) performed by the game control unit 200, which is executed when the ending time has elapsed (Yes in S1417).
When the game state setting process is performed, as a premise, the winning game flag is set to ON in S1401 of FIG. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 15, the game control unit 200 first determines the type of the hit (S1501, S1502, S1503, S1506). These determinations can be made based on, for example, the type of symbol set as setting information in the RAM 203 in the jackpot determination process (FIG. 9). Since these determinations are substantially the same as S902, S903, and S905 in the jackpot determination process (FIG. 9), the determination results of S902, S903, and S905 may be used.

If it is a small hit (Yes in S1501), the gaming state (internal state of the pachinko gaming machine 100) is not changed, so the gaming state setting process is terminated.
When the winning type is a big hit with a low probability short game state (No in S1501, Yes in S1502 and S1503), the game control unit 200 turns on the short flag (S1504). Thereby, the setting of the gaming state in the RAM 203 becomes the low gaming state with a low probability. In addition, the game control unit 200 sets an initial value of the lottery count J (S1505) and ends the game state setting process. The initial value of the lottery number J is 100 in the illustrated example. Therefore, if the lottery in the low probability short game state is performed 100 times, the low probability short game state is ended and the low probability short short game state is entered.

  On the other hand, if the winning type is a big hit in the low probability short-time no-game state (No in S1501, Yes in 1502, No in S1503), the game control unit 200 ends the process without turning on both the short-time flag and the probability change flag. To do. Therefore, the setting of the game state of the RAM 203 for the game after the jackpot becomes a low probability short time no game state.

  When the winning type is a big hit in the short probability gaming state with a high probability (No in S1501, S1502, Yes in S1506), the game control unit 200 turns on the hourly flag (S1507) and sets the initial value of the number of lottery times J. (S1508). In this case, the initial value of the number of times of lottery J is 10,000 in the illustrated example. Further, the game control unit 200 turns on the probability change flag (S1509), and sets an initial value of the number of lotteries X (S1510). The initial value of the number of times of lottery X is 10,000 in the illustrated example. As a result, the setting of the gaming state in the RAM 203 becomes a high probability and short gaming state. If the lottery in the high probability short game state is performed 10,000 times, the high probability short game state is terminated and the low probability short short game state is entered.

  On the other hand, when the winning type is a big hit in the high probability short-time no-game state (No in S1501, S1502, and S1506), the game control unit 200 turns on only the probability variation flag (S1509), and the initial value ( 10000 times) is set (S1510). Thereby, the setting of the gaming state in the RAM 203 becomes a high probability short time no gaming state. Then, if the lottery in the high probability short-time non-game state is performed 10,000 times, the high-probability short-time non-game state is finished and the low-probability short-time non-game state is entered.

[Electric tulip processing by game control unit]
FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the contents of the electric tulip process in the electric accessory process shown in S504 of FIG. 5-3.
In the electric tulip process, the electric tulip operation control unit 238 of the game control unit 200 first checks whether or not the auxiliary game flag is ON in the flag setting of the RAM 203 (S1601). When the auxiliary game flag is OFF, the electric tulip 123 is not released, and thus the electric tulip process is terminated (No in S1601). On the other hand, if the auxiliary game flag is ON (Yes in S1601), the electric tulip operation control unit 238 determines whether the electric tulip 123 is operating (S1602).

  When the electric tulip 123 is not in operation (No in S1602), the electric tulip operation control unit 238 sets the operation pattern of the electric tulip 123 (S1603), and operates the electric tulip 123 with the set operation pattern (S1604). . Here, the operation pattern is set based on the time reduction flag set in the processes of S1104 and S1114 in FIG. 11, S1504 and S1507 in FIG. For example, when the time reduction flag is OFF at the time of setting in S1603, an operation pattern that opens once with an opening time of 0.15 seconds is set, and when the time reduction flag is ON, 1.80 seconds are released. An operating pattern that opens three times in time is set. Thus, normally, when the time reduction flag is ON (when it is in the time reduction state), the electric tulip 123 is opened a plurality of times for a long time, and the winning support that makes it easy to win the second start port 122 (electricity chewing support). Is done.

  When it is determined in S1602 that the electric tulip 123 is in operation (Yes in S1602), or after the electric tulip 123 is operated in S1604, the electric tulip operation control unit 238 passes the open time in the set operation pattern. It is determined whether it has been done (S1605). If the opening time has not elapsed, the operation state (open state) of the electric tulip 123 is continued, and thus the electric tulip process is terminated (No in S1605). On the other hand, if the opening time has elapsed (Yes in S1605), the electric tulip operation control unit 238 sets the auxiliary game flag to OFF and ends the electric tulip process (S1606).

[Random number judgment method]
Here, a determination method using random numbers performed in the jackpot determination process (FIG. 9), the variation pattern selection process (FIG. 10), the normal symbol process (FIG. 13), and the like will be described in detail.
FIG. 17 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a random number (determination table) used in the special symbol lottery and the normal symbol lottery in the present embodiment.
FIG. 17A shows a configuration example of a jackpot random number used in the special symbol lottery, FIG. 17B shows a configuration example of the jackpot random number used in the special symbol lottery, and FIG. 17C shows a special symbol lottery. A configuration example of reach random numbers used, and FIG. 17 (d) each show a configuration example of hit random numbers used in normal symbol lottery.

  Referring to FIG. 17 (a), as the determination value of the jackpot random number, two types of gaming states of the pachinko gaming machine 100, a jackpot with a low probability state and a jackpot with a high probability state, and a jackpot are set. The range of values of random numbers (big hit random numbers) is 300 from 0 to 299 in all cases. In the case of a special symbol lottery in a low probability state (a jackpot lottery), only one winning value is set, and the winning probability is 1/300. In the case of a special symbol lottery in a high probability state, 10 winning values are set, and the winning probability is 10/300 (= 1/30). That is, in the example shown in the figure, if the winning symbols 121 and 122 are won in the high probability state and the special symbol lottery is performed, the winning probability is 10 times that in the case where the special symbol lottery is performed in the low probability state. Further, three winning values are set regardless of the low probability state or the high probability state, and the winning probability is 3/300 (= 1/100).

  Referring to FIG. 17 (b), five types of jackpot symbols are prepared: low probability symbol A, low probability symbol B, high probability symbol A, high probability symbol B, and latent symbol symbol. Here, the low-probability symbol A and the low-probability symbol B are symbols indicating that the low-probability state is a big hit. Of these, the low-probability symbol A is a long win (low-probability short-time gaming state), and the low-probability symbol B is Represents each short hit (low probability, short no-game state). The high-probability symbol A and the high-probability symbol B are symbols representing a jackpot of a high-probability state. Among these symbols, the high-probability symbol A is a long win (high-probability short-time gaming state), and the high-probability symbol B is a short-hit ( High probability short-time non-game state). The latent symbol is a symbol representing that it is a big hit in a high probability short-time no-game state. Therefore, the high probability symbol B and the latent probability symbol have the same gaming state after the jackpot game, but the latent probability symbol is a condition for performing a latent effect that does not clearly notify the player that the probability state is high. Therefore, it is provided separately from the high probability symbol B. The range of random number values is 250 from 0 to 249. In addition, in the jackpot symbol random number, a winning value is set for each of the first start port 121 and the second start port 122 that trigger the special symbol lottery.

In the low probability pattern A, 35 values are assigned as winning values in both the first start port 121 and the second start port 122. Therefore, the probability of winning with the low probability symbol A when winning a jackpot is 35/250 (= 7/50).
In the low probability symbol B, 15 values are assigned as winning values for both the first start port 121 and the second start port 122. Therefore, when winning the jackpot, the probability of winning with the low probability symbol B is 15/250 (= 3/50).

In the high probability symbol A, 25 values are assigned as winning values when winning in the first start port 121. Therefore, the probability of winning with the high-probability symbol A is 25/250 (= 1/10) in the case of winning the jackpot in the special symbol lottery started by winning the first starting port 121.
On the other hand, 175 values are assigned as winning values when winning at the second start port 122. Therefore, the probability of winning with the high-probability symbol A is 175/250 (= 7/10) in the case of winning the jackpot in the special symbol lottery started by winning the second starting port 122.

In the high probability symbol B, 75 values are assigned as winning values when winning in the first start port 121. Therefore, the probability of winning with the high-probability symbol B in the special symbol lottery started by winning the first starting port 121 is 75/250 (= 3/10).
On the other hand, 25 values are assigned as winning values when winning at the second start port 122. Therefore, the probability of winning with the high-probability symbol B in the special symbol lottery started by winning the second starting port 122 is 25/250 (= 1/10).

In the latent symbol, 100 values are assigned as winning values when winning at the first start port 121. Therefore, the probability of winning in the latent symbol when winning a big win in the special symbol lottery started by winning the first starting port 121 is 100/250 (= 2/5).
On the other hand, the winning value in the latent symbol is not assigned to the second starting port 122, and when winning in the second starting port 122, it is not won in the latent symbol.

  As described above, in the example shown in FIG. 17B, the jackpot when winning the first start port 121 has a probability of becoming a jackpot (high probability symbol B, latent probability symbol) of the high probability short-time non-game state. The probability that the jackpot when winning the second start port 122 is high is a jackpot (high probability symbol A) in the short game state with high probability is high. In this way, by making the winning probabilities of the jackpot types different when winning at the first start port 121 and when winning at the second start port 122, various game characteristics can be provided. Further, the arrangement of the first start port 121 and the second start port 122 on the game board 110 is devised so that it is easy to aim at either the first start port 121 or the second start port 122 in a specific state (mode). By configuring the above, it is possible to encourage the player to participate in more aggressive games.

Next, the determination of reach random numbers will be described.
Referring to FIG. 17 (c), the range of random number values is 250 from 0 to 249, and 22 random numbers are assigned to the lottery result (with reach) for performing the reach effect, and the reach effect is not performed. 228 random numbers are assigned to the result (no reach). In other words, in the illustrated example, when a special symbol lottery is not won, a reach effect is performed with a probability of 22/250 (= 11/125).

It should be noted that the effect with reach and the effect without reach determined by the reach random number indicate a mode of effect performed in the image display unit 114. That is, during the variation display of special symbols, for example, three columns of symbols consisting of a number sequence in which numbers 1 to 9 are continuously written in the vertical direction are displayed, and the variation display of special symbols is started. At the same time, these symbols start to scroll.
Then, in the effect with reach, when the scrolling is stopped and the symbols are stopped and displayed after elapse of a predetermined time after the start of the scrolling, any two symbols (sequences) are stopped first. At this time, the same number is stopped and displayed on a straight line extending horizontally or diagonally, and the last one row gradually decreases the scrolling speed, and there is a sense of expectation that three identical numbers will be aligned on the straight line. Give to the player. Such an effect with reach includes a so-called super reach effect in which various characters appear or a story develops before the last line of scrolling stops. On the other hand, unlike the effect with reach, the effect without reach does not produce an effect that gives the player a sense of expectation, and the symbols stop and display in a state where the same numbers are not aligned on a straight line extending horizontally or diagonally. Is.
As described above, the reach random number is used to determine whether to perform an effect with reach or an effect without reach in the image display unit 114 when the determination result of the jackpot random number is a loss. A reachable effect appears with a probability, so that the player is appropriately expected.
In addition, when a big win is won, a reachable effect is always performed, and finally the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a state where the same numbers are aligned on a straight line extending horizontally or diagonally. On the other hand, in the case of winning with a small win or loss, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a state where the same numbers are not aligned on the straight line.

Next, the determination of the winning random number used for the normal symbol lottery will be described.
Referring to FIG. 17D, the range of the random number value is 10 from 0 to 9, and one value is assigned as the winning value when the time-short flag is OFF, and as the winning value when the time-short flag is ON. Nine values are assigned. Therefore, when the game ball passes through the gate 124 and the normal symbol lottery (open / close lottery) is performed in the timeless state, the player wins with a probability of 1/10. On the other hand, if the game ball passes through the gate 124 and the normal symbol lottery (open / close lottery) is performed in the short-time state, the player wins with a probability of 9/10.

A random value as determination information used for various types of lottery starts from a predetermined initial value and is incremented by one each time the random number update process (S501) shown in FIG. 5-3 is performed. Then, the values at the time each lottery is performed are acquired by the start opening switch process (FIG. 6) and the gate switch process (FIG. 7), and used in the special symbol process (FIG. 8) and the normal symbol process (FIG. 13). The Note that this random value counter is an infinite loop counter, and returns to 0 again after reaching the maximum value of the set random number (for example, 299 for the jackpot random number shown in FIG. 17A). In addition, since the random number update process is performed at regular intervals, if the initial value of each random number is specified, the winning value may be estimated based on such information. Therefore, in general, a mechanism for randomly changing the initial value of each random number at an appropriate timing has been introduced.
Note that the random number range, winning value ratio, and winning value shown in the configuration example of each random number in FIG. 17 are merely examples, and are not limited to the illustrated values.

[Setting example of fluctuation pattern]
Next, an example of setting a variation pattern used in the variation pattern selection process shown in FIG. 10 will be described.
FIG. 18 is a diagram illustrating a setting example of a variation pattern used in the variation pattern selection process illustrated in FIG.
In the example illustrated in FIG. 18, three types of variation patterns A to C are set as variation patterns when the determination result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit (in the case of Yes in S1001 in FIG. 10). In addition, six types of variation patterns D to I are set as variation patterns when the determination result of the special symbol lottery is out of place (in the case of No in S1001 in FIG. 10). The fluctuation time is 90 seconds for the fluctuation pattern A, 60 seconds for the fluctuation pattern B, 30 seconds for the fluctuation pattern C, 60 seconds for the fluctuation pattern D, 30 seconds for the fluctuation pattern E, 15 seconds for the fluctuation pattern F, and 15 seconds for the fluctuation pattern G. 13 seconds, the fluctuation pattern H is set to 7 seconds, and the fluctuation pattern I is set to 3 seconds. That is, the variation pattern of the special symbol determines the determination result in the special symbol lottery and the variation time of the special symbol.

  The variation patterns D to F are variation patterns that are selected when the reach effect is performed (in the case of Yes in S1004 in FIG. 10), and the variation patterns G to I are when the reach effect is not performed (FIG. 10 in the case of No in S1004). Since the reach effect is always performed when the determination result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit, the presence or absence of the reach effect is not referred to when the variation patterns A to C are selected.

  Further, among the variation patterns G to I, when the variation pattern G has a holding number of 0, when the variation pattern H has one or two holding numbers, the variation pattern I has a holding number of three or four. It is set as a variation pattern to be selected for each of the individual patterns. That is, the average time of the special symbol variation is set to be shorter as the number of pending determinations in the special symbol lottery is larger.

  The game control unit 200 determines whether or not the variation pattern random value (see S604 and S610 in FIG. 6) acquired when the game ball wins the start ports 121 and 122, the determination result shown in the setting example in FIG. The variation pattern of the special symbol is determined based on conditions such as the number of holds. Then, the information of the determined variation pattern of the special symbol is included in the variation start command and is sent from the game control unit 200 to the effect control unit 300. As will be described later, in the effect control unit 300, an effect corresponding to a change time specified based on information of a change pattern included in the change start command (executable during the change time) as an effect when the special symbol changes Is selected and executed.

Although not shown, the variation pattern A is selected at the highest rate among the variation patterns A to C selected when the determination result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit, and the variation at the next highest rate. It can be set so that the pattern B is selected and the variation pattern C is selected at the lowest rate.
In the example shown in FIG. 18, there is no distinction between the case where the game ball wins the first start port 121 and the case where the game ball wins the second start port 122, but the first start port 121 and the second start port 121 It is also possible to change the setting of the variation pattern depending on which of 122 is won.

[Command structure and transmission method]
Here, the configuration and transmission method of commands (effect control commands and setting commands) output from the game control unit 200 to the effect control unit 300 will be described.
FIG. 19A is a diagram illustrating a command configuration. 19A shows the data structure of the command, and FIG. 19A shows the structure of the command as a bit string.

  As shown in FIG. 19A, a command output from the game control unit 200 to the effect control unit 300 is composed of 2 bytes. This command is composed of a 1-byte “code” as the first data portion and a 1-byte “data” as the second data portion. “Code” indicates the type of command, and “Data” indicates the value of the command. This command is transmitted from the game control unit 200 to the effect control unit 300 using asynchronous synchronization by one serial signal. More generally, the “code” that is the first data part has a size of a bit (a is an integer of 2 or more), and the value of the leading 1 bit is specified as either 1 or 0. The “data” as the second data part has a size of n × a bits (n is an integer of 1 or more), and the value of the first 1 bit is different from the value of the first 1 bit of the first data part. Specific to the value.

  Since start-stop synchronization is used, a start bit (bit indicated as “S” in the figure) is provided at the head of each of “code” and “data” constituting the command, and 1 at the end. End bits of bits (bits indicated as “E” in the figure) are provided. Each of the “code” and “data” constituting the command is provided with one parity bit (bit indicated as “P” in the figure).

  As shown in FIG. 19A, both the “code” and “data” constituting the command have a data size of 1 byte (8 bits). When transmitted, the “code” and “data” are provided with a start bit, an end bit, and a parity bit, respectively. For this reason, it is not easy for the presentation control unit 300 that receives a command to identify whether the received data string is a “code” or “data” of the command from the outline of the data string. Therefore, in the present embodiment, a flag for identifying “code” and “data” is set. Specifically, the value of the specific portion of the 8-bit value constituting the “code” is made different from the value of the portion corresponding to the specific portion of the “code” among the 8-bit values constituting the “data”. .

  In the example illustrated in FIG. 19B, the first 1 bit of each of “code” and “data” is used as a flag. That is, in the 8-bit value constituting the “code”, the first 1-bit value is “1”, and in the 8-bit value constituting the “data”, the first 1-bit value is “0”. . Thereby, the effect control unit 300 can identify whether the data string is “code” or “data” by examining the value of the first 1 bit following the start bit of the received data string. The specific value of the flag is merely an example, and a value different from the above value may be used as long as “code” and “data” can be identified.

  Here, since the value of the first bit of “code” is specified as “1”, the range of values that can be taken by “code” is 128 from 10000000B (= 80H) to 11111111B (= FFH). It is. Note that the letter “B” attached to each value indicates binary notation, and the letter “H” indicates hexadecimal notation. In addition, since the value of the first 1 bit of “data” is specified as “0”, the range of values that “data” can take is 128 from 00000000B (= 00H) to 01111111B (= 7FH). is there. That is, according to the configuration shown in FIGS. 19A and 19B, 128 types of commands that can take 128 types of values can be set.

  By the way, in the pachinko gaming machine 100, many types of effects are executed according to the gaming state, the determination result of the special symbol lottery, and the like. Therefore, a large number of commands are prepared for the commands for effect control. In particular, the “data” that is the value indicating the specific content of the command may be insufficient with the above 128. On the other hand, the “code” indicating the type of command is usually smaller than the above 128. Therefore, it is conceivable to use a part of the bit string of “code” to describe the value of “data”.

  For example, consider the case where the last 1 bit of “code” is used to describe the value of “data”. Hereinafter, each bit in the 8-bit bit string constituting “code” and “data” is referred to as first to eighth bits. Separately from the bit string that makes up the “code”, the “code” value that actually indicates the type of command is called the “code value”, and separately from the bit string that makes up the “data”, the actual command value is The value of “data” shown is called “data value”. Then, the code value is described using the first to seventh bits in the “code” bit string, and the data value is all of the “data” bit string (from the first bit to the eighth bit). , And the 8th bit of “code”.

  With this configuration, the possible range of the code value is that the value of the first bit is specified as “1” and the total size is 7 bits, so that the range from 1000000B (= 40H) to 1111111B (= 7FH) ) Up to 64). The possible range of the data value is 128 values represented by 8 bits of “data” in which the value of the first bit is specified as “0”, and values “0” and “8” of the 8th bit of “code”. 1 ”is 256. Therefore, it is possible to set a command having 256 kinds of values as data values.

  Note that the above configuration in the case where a data value is described using a part of the “code” is merely an example, and the specific number of bits and value are not limited to the above configuration example. For example, the data value may be described using the seventh bit and the eighth bit of the “code”. More generally, a predetermined type of data (data value) using a predetermined bit constituting “code” as the first data portion and a bit constituting “data” as the second data portion. Is recorded. Then, by using the remaining bits excluding the predetermined bits in the “code” which is the first data portion, other types of data (code values) different from the predetermined types of data (data values) are recorded. The In other words, a bit constituting “data” as the second data part and b bit (b is smaller than a−1 and an integer of 1 or more) constituting “code” as the first data part. In use, a data value having a size of (a + b) bits is recorded.

  Further, as a means for increasing the number of data values that can be handled, it is conceivable to increase the bit string of “data” describing the data values. For example, it is conceivable to prepare “first data” and “second data” as bit strings describing data values. In this case, if each bit string is 8 bits, a data value can be described by a bit string of 16 bits in total. In order to distinguish between “first data” and “second data”, if the second bit of the 8-bit bit string is used as a flag, for example, the first bit and the second bit of “first data” Can be “00B”, and the first and second bits of “second data” can be “01B”. The first bit has a value “0” as a flag for identifying “code”. That is, the “data” that is the second data portion is a bit string (“first data”, “second data”,...) That represents each data value every 8 bits (more generally, For each a bit), the same value as the value of the first 1 bit is set.

  With this configuration, the range of values that the “first data” can take is 64 from 00000000B (= 00H) to 00111111B (= 3FH), and the range of values that the “second data” can take is Since there are 64 from 01000000B (= 40H) to 01111111B (= 7FH), the total is 4096 (= 64 × 64). Here, the first bit is used as a flag for identifying “code” and “data” (“first data” and “second data”), and “first data” and “second data” Although the second bit is used as a flag for identifying the first and second bits, a flag for identifying four types of bit strings may be set using the first and second bits. For example, “code” may have the value of the first and second bits “11B”, and “data” may have the value of the first and second bits “00B”, “01B”, and “10B”. Conceivable.

[Operation of production control unit]
Next, the operation of the effect control unit 300 will be described.
FIG. 19-2 is a flowchart showing the operation of the effect control unit 300.
The operation of the effect control unit 300 includes a main process shown in FIG. 19-2 (a) and an interrupt process shown in FIG. 19-2 (b). Referring to FIG. 19-2 (a), the production control unit 300 first performs an initial setting at startup (S1901), sets a cycle of a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) (S1902), and then sets a set cycle. Accordingly, the interrupt process is accepted while updating the random number used in the production control (S1903).

  The interrupt process is periodically performed according to the cycle set in S1902. Referring to FIG. 19-2 (b), in this interruption process, the effect control unit 300 receives a command from the game control unit 200 and performs a command reception process (S1911). In this command reception process, an effect pattern is selected. In addition, the effect control unit 300 performs effect button processing for accepting an operation of the effect button 161 and the like by the player (S1912). Thereafter, the effect control unit 300 performs command transmission processing for transmitting a command including information on the selected effect pattern to the image / sound control unit 310 and the lamp control unit 320 (S1913). As a result, effects such as image display on the image display unit 114, sound output, operation of the movable accessory 115, light emission of the panel lamp 116 and the frame lamp 157 are performed.

[Command reception processing by the production control unit]
FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command reception process (S1911 in FIG. 19-2 (b)).
In this command reception process, the effect control unit 300 first determines whether or not the received command is a command for increasing the number of holds (holding number increase command) (S2001). This pending number increase command is set by the game control unit 200 in the start port switch process shown in FIG. 6 (S606, S612), and transmitted to the effect control unit 300 in the output process (S506) shown in FIG. 5-3. Is done. When the command is an increase command for the number of holds (Yes in S2001), the effect control unit 300 adds 1 to the value of the number of holds held in the RAM 303 (S2002), and shows the value of the number of holds after the addition. Is set in the RAM 303 (S2003).

When the received command is not a pending number increase command (No in S2001), or when a command is received after setting the pending number increase command in S2003, the effect control unit 300 determines whether or not the received command is a change start command. (S2004). This variation start command is set in the special symbol process shown in FIG. 8 in the game control unit 200 (S811), and transmitted to the effect control unit 300 in the output process (S506) shown in FIG. 5-3.
When the received command is a change start command (Yes in S2004), the effect control unit 300 executes an effect selection process (S2005). Details of the effect selection process will be described later.

When the received command is not a variation start command (No in S2001 and S2004), or when a command is received after execution of the effect selection process in S2005, the effect control unit 300 determines whether or not the received command is a change stop command. (S2006). This variation stop command is set in the special symbol process shown in FIG. 8 in the game control unit 200 (S814), and transmitted to the effect control unit 300 in the output process (S506) shown in FIG. 5-3.
When the received command is a change stop command (Yes in S2006), the effect control unit 300 executes a process during end of change effect (S2007). Details of the process during the end of the variation effect will be described later.

When the received command is not the change start command and the change stop command (No in S2001, S2004, and S2006), or when the command is received after the execution of the variable effect end process in S2007, the effect control unit 300 determines that the received command is It is determined whether or not it is an opening command for starting the opening in the jackpot effect (S2008). This opening command is set in the stop process shown in FIG. 11 (S1118), and transmitted to the effect control unit 300 in the output process (S506) shown in FIG. 5-3.
When the received command is an opening command (Yes in S2008), the effect control unit 300 executes a hit effect selection process (S2009). Details of the winning effect selection process will be described later.

When the received command is not a change start command, a change stop command, and an opening command (No in S2001, S2004, S2006, and S2008), or when a command is received after performing the hit effect selection process in S2009, the effect control unit 300 It is determined whether or not the received command is an ending command for starting the ending in the jackpot effect (S2010). This ending command is set in the special winning opening process shown in FIG. 14 (S1413), and transmitted to the effect control unit 300 in the output process (S506) shown in FIG. 5-3.
When the received command is an ending command (Yes in S2010), the effect control unit 300 executes an ending effect selection process (S2011). Details of the ending effect selection process will be described later.

  If the received command is not a variation start command, variation stop command, opening command and ending command (No in S2001, S2004, S2006, S2008 and S2010), or if a command is received after the end of the ending effect selection process in S2011, The effect control unit 300 executes a customer waiting command reception process for the received command to shift to the customer waiting state (S2012). Details of the customer waiting command reception process will be described later.

FIG. 21 is a diagram illustrating a setting example of the mode flag.
When an effect is performed by the effect control unit 300, various effect patterns are selected and executed based on the set effect mode. This effect mode is determined by a mode flag set in the RAM 303. Here, the mode flag is set to any value from 0 to 4, and five types of effect modes from A mode to E mode are assigned to each mode flag. The mode flag is set according to the lottery result of the special symbol lottery or the number of lotteries of the special symbol lottery.
Mode flag 1 for jackpot of high probability symbol A, mode flag 2 for jackpot of low probability symbol A, mode flag 3 for jackpot of high probability symbol B and low probability symbol B, jackpot of latent symbol symbol and A mode flag 4 is assigned to each small hit. Here, the types of these symbols are the same as those shown in FIG. No mode flag 0 is assigned to any of them. In mode flags 1 to 4, mode flag 0 is set by executing special symbol lottery a predetermined number of times.
Further, in the example shown in FIG. 21, the parameter M (M value) used in the process during the end of the changing effect is set individually for each mode except the A mode.

FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the contents of the effect selection process (S2005) of FIG.
In this effect selection process, the effect control unit 300 first analyzes the received variation start command (S2201). Further, the effect control unit 300 refers to the current mode flag of the pachinko gaming machine 100 from the setting of the RAM 303 (S2202), and subtracts 1 from the value of the number of holds held in the RAM 303 (S2203). Then, the effect control unit 300 is based on various setting information (information about jackpot type, gaming state after jackpot game, variation pattern, etc.) obtained from the analysis result of the change start command and the effect mode determined by the mode flag. Then, an effect pattern (fluctuation effect pattern) of symbol variation by an image displayed on the image display unit 114 in the effect mode is selected (S2204). Finally, the effect control unit 300 reads from the ROM 302 image data and sound data used for the effect by the selected effect pattern, and sets a change effect start command instructing the start of execution of the selected effect in the RAM 303 together with these data. Then, the effect selection process ends (S2205).

  Although not described in detail, in the effect change pattern selection process in S2204, the effect mode, the change pattern, and the effect random number (one of the random numbers updated in S1903 in FIG. The production pattern is determined based on the random number value). Based on the effect pattern determined here, the decorative symbol variation display, the background effect, and the notice effect are determined. The decorative symbol variation display is an effect display performed by the image display unit 114 in accordance with the special symbol variation display performed by the first special symbol display 221 or the second special symbol display 222. In this variable display of decorative symbols, a reach effect or the like is executed.

FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the contents of the changing effect end process (S2007) of FIG.
In this variation effect end process, the effect control unit 300 first analyzes the received variation stop command (S2301). Further, the effect control unit 300 refers to the current mode flag of the pachinko gaming machine 100 from the setting of the RAM 303 (S2302). Then, the production control unit 300 determines whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is based on the information indicating the type of the symbol when the special symbol variation obtained from the analysis result of the variation stop command is stopped (big hit or small hit). It is determined whether or not (S2303). If it is any hit (Yes in S2303), the mode flag set in the RAM 303 is changed based on the setting example shown in FIG. 21 according to the type of the hit (S2304).

  On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is not successful (No in S2303), the effect control unit 300 next checks whether or not the value of the mode flag is 0 (S2305). When the mode flag is not 0 (No in S2305), the effect control unit 300 subtracts 1 from the parameter M (S2306), and checks whether the value of M has become 0 (S2307). If the value of M becomes 0 (Yes in S2307), the effect control unit 300 sets the mode flag to 0 (S2308).

  If the mode flag is 0 in S2305 (Yes in S2305), if the value of the parameter M is not 0 in S2307 (No in S2307), or after setting the mode flag to 0 in S2308, or in S2304 After changing the mode flag, the effect control unit 300 sets a change effect end command for instructing the end of the design change effect in the RAM 303, and ends the change effect end process (S2309). Here, referring to FIG. 21, when the mode flag is changed in S2304, the effect mode after the end of the change effect is an effect mode corresponding to the winning type. When the mode flag is 0 in S2305 and when the mode flag is set to 0 in S2308, the effect mode after the end of the change effect is the A mode. If the value of parameter M does not become 0 in S2307, the previous production mode is continued.

FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the contents of the hit effect selection process (S2009) of FIG.
In this winning effect selection process, the effect control unit 300 first analyzes the received opening command (S2401), and selects an effect pattern (winning effect pattern) according to the contents of the effect mode based on the mode flag (S2402). . Then, the effect control unit 300 reads out image data and sound data used for the effect by the selected effect pattern from the ROM 302, and sets a hit effect start command for instructing the selected effect in the RAM 303 together with these data. The effect selection process is terminated (S2403). As a result, the performance during the big hit is determined.

FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the contents of the ending effect selection process (S2011) of FIG.
In this ending effect selection process, the effect control unit 300 first analyzes the received ending command (S2501), and selects an effect pattern (ending effect pattern) according to the contents of the effect mode based on the mode flag (S2502). . Then, the effect control unit 300 reads out image data and sound data used for the effect by the selected effect pattern from the ROM 302, and sets an ending effect start command for instructing the selected effect in the RAM 303 together with these data. The effect selection process is terminated (S2503).

FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the contents of the customer waiting command reception process (S2012) of FIG.
The effect control unit 300 determines whether or not a customer waiting command for shifting to the customer waiting state has been received (S2601). When the customer waiting command is received (Yes in S2601), the effect control unit 300 starts measuring the elapsed time (S2602), and turns on the measurement flag in the RAM 303 (S2603). On the other hand, when the received command is not a customer waiting command (No in S2601), the effect control unit 300 determines whether or not the measurement flag held in the RAM 303 is ON (S2604). If the measurement flag is OFF (No in S2604), the customer waiting command reception process is terminated.

  When the measurement flag is ON (Yes in S2604 or after being turned ON in S2603), the effect control unit 300 next determines whether or not the measurement time has reached a predetermined time-up time (S2605). . If the time is not up (No in S2605), the customer waiting command reception process is terminated. On the other hand, when the time is up (Yes in S2605), the effect control unit 300 turns off the measurement flag held in the RAM 303 (S2606), and sets a customer waiting effect command for performing the customer waiting effect in the RAM 303. The customer waiting command reception process is terminated (S2607).

  When the command reception process is completed as described above, the RAM 303 is set with any one of a variation effect start command, a variation effect end command, a hit effect start command, an ending effect start command, and a customer waiting effect command.

FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the contents of the effect button process (S1912 in FIG. 19-2 (b)).
In this effect button process, the effect control unit 300 first determines whether or not an operation means such as the effect button 161 by the player has been operated (S2701). Here, the operation of the operation means includes turning on the effect button 161 and turning it on when the center key and the surrounding keys of the effect key 162 are pressed. In addition, when an operation device other than the effect button 161 and the effect key 162 such as a touch panel is provided in the pachinko gaming machine 100, this includes detecting the operation of the device. The effect control unit 300 receives an operation signal from the controller of these devices and detects that an operation has been performed.

  If the operation means such as the effect button 161 is operated (Yes in S2701), the effect control unit 300 sets an effect button command including information indicating the operation content of the operation means in the RAM 303, and ends the effect button process. (S2702).

  After that, the effect control unit 300 performs the command transmission process (S1913) of FIG. 19-2 (b), and the command set in the RAM 303 by the command reception process and the effect button process described above is displayed in the image / sound control unit 310. And transmitted to the lamp controller 320. Then, the image / sound control unit 310 and the lamp control unit 320 display an image on the image display unit 114, sound output, operation of the movable accessory 115, light emission of the panel lamp 116 and the frame lamp 157 based on the received command. Is controlled to execute the set effect.

[Advance notice based on prior judgment]
Next, a notice effect based on prior determination according to the present embodiment will be described.
In the present embodiment, as described with reference to FIG. 6, the game ball wins the first start port 121 (see FIG. 1 or 3) and the first start port switch 211 (see FIG. 3) is turned on. And when the game ball is won at the second start port 122 (see FIG. 1 or 3) and the second start port switch 212 (see FIG. 3) is turned ON, the lottery at the time of symbol change Prior to the determination (see S808 and S809 in FIG. 8), prior determination (prefetching) of the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is performed (see S605 and S611 in FIG. 6).

  Further, in the present embodiment, based on the result of the above prior determination, a notice effect (suggest effect) for indicating the determination result to the player is performed. This notice effect is executed at the time of a symbol change for another winning ball that is performed prior to a symbol change for the winning ball (holding ball) for which a prior determination has been made. In the present embodiment, the upper limit of the number of holding balls is four per one starting port (first starting port 121 or second starting port 122) (see FIG. 6). In addition, priority is given to the digestion of the reserved balls in the second start port 122. In this case, for example, when a preliminary determination is made with respect to the reserved ball with the second start opening 122, the maximum symbol variation for four winning balls is performed before the symbol variation for the reserved ball is performed. It becomes. In the notice effect related to the reserved ball that has been determined in advance, if multiple symbol changes are made before the symbol change for the reserved ball, even if the notice effect that spans the multiple symbol changes is performed good.

[Configuration of the RAM of the Game Control Unit and the RAM of the Production Control Unit for Performing the Advance Effect]
In order to execute such a notice effect based on the prior determination, the RAM 203 of the game control unit 200 and the RAM 303 of the effect control unit 300 in the present embodiment have the following configurations.
FIG. 28 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of the RAM 203 (see FIG. 3) of the game control unit 200 according to the present embodiment. FIG. 28A is a block diagram showing the configuration of the storage area 204, and FIG. 28B is a block diagram showing the configuration of each storage unit shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 28A, the RAM 203 includes a storage area 204 as a special symbol holding storage area for storing the jackpot random number acquired by the jackpot random number lottery. This storage area 204 has eight storage units corresponding to the maximum number of reservations of the first start port 121 and the number of reservations of the second start port 122 (when the upper limit value of each reservation number is 4). . Specifically, the storage area 204 includes a first storage unit 204a, a second storage unit 204b, a third storage unit 204c, a fourth storage unit 204d, a fifth storage unit 204e, a sixth storage unit 204f, and a seventh storage. Part 204g and eighth storage part 204h.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 28 (b), each of these storage units 204a to 204h includes an area for storing the number of fluctuations N when winning the jackpot, and a winning start port (first start port 121 or And an area in which information indicating the second start port 122) is stored. Each of the storage units 204a to 204h includes an area for storing the acquired jackpot random number, an area for storing a design random number, and an area for storing a reach random number. That is, each of the storage units 204a to 204h stores a jackpot random number, a design random number, and a reach random number. In addition, each of the storage units 204a to 204h has an area for storing prior determination information. The advance determination information is information obtained by the advance determination process (see S605 and S611 in FIG. 6) based on each of the above random numbers. The content of the pre-determination information is the same as the information obtained as various determination results in the special symbol processing (see FIG. 8), and specifically, the type of winning (big hit, small hit, off) and big hit In this case, the type of jackpot and the content of the production are information for indicating whether the production is a reachable production or a non-reach production.

  Here, each random number is stored in order from the first storage unit 204a. More specifically, for example, when no random number is stored in any of the first storage unit 204a to the eighth storage unit 204h, the acquired random number is stored in the first storage unit 204a. Further, for example, when random numbers are already stored in the first storage unit 204a to the fourth storage unit 204d, the acquired random number is stored in the fifth storage unit 204e.

FIG. 29 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of the RAM 303 (see FIG. 3) of the effect control unit 300 according to the present embodiment. FIG. 29A is a block diagram showing the configuration of the reserved storage areas 305 and 306, and FIG. 29B is a block diagram showing the configuration of each storage unit shown in FIG.
As shown in FIG. 29 (a), the RAM 303 includes a first hold storage area 305 and a second hold storage area 306 as a hold status storage area for storing a status where a hold ball is held. The first holding storage area 305 and the second holding storage area 306 correspond to holding for winning in the first starting port 121 and holding for winning in the second starting port 122, respectively. Have. Specifically, the first reserved storage area 305 includes a first storage unit 305a, a second storage unit 305b, a third storage unit 305c, and a fourth storage unit 305d. The second reserved storage area 306 includes a first storage unit 306a, a second storage unit 306b, a third storage unit 306c, and a fourth storage unit 306d.

  As shown in FIG. 29 (b), each of these storage units 305a to 305d and 306a to 306d has a hold flag storage area for turning ON / OFF the hold flag, and a notification flag storage for turning ON / OFF the notification flag. And a region. The hold flag is a flag for identifying the presence or absence of a hold ball for each of the storage units 305a to 305d and 306a to 306d. That is, for example, when the number of holds due to winning at the first start port 121 is 3, the hold flag is turned ON in the three hold flag storage areas of the first to third storage units 305a, 305b, and 305c. The notification flag is a flag for identifying the presence / absence of a notification command of a pre-read result to be described later for each reserved ball. That is, for example, when a pre-determination process (see S605 and S611 in FIG. 6 and FIG. 30 to be described later) is performed on the above-described three reserved balls and a notification command is set for the third reserved ball, The notification flag is turned on in the notification flag storage area of the storage unit 305c.

  That is, the RAM 203 and the RAM 303 function as a holding ball information storage unit that stores information (holding ball information) including a result of a prior determination regarding the holding ball in the game control unit 200 and the effect control unit 300. In addition, the game control unit 200 is a lottery unit that performs a lottery lottery, and is a preliminary determination unit that performs a preliminary determination process. The effect control unit 300 is an effect control unit that performs a notice effect for giving a notice (improvement) of a preliminary determination result.

[Preliminary judgment processing]
Next, the prior determination process (see S605 and S611 in FIG. 6) will be described in detail.
First, a determination method using random numbers in the prior determination process will be described.
FIG. 30 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of random numbers used in the pre-determination process in the present embodiment. 30A shows a configuration example of a jackpot random number in the preliminary determination process, FIG. 30B shows a configuration example of the jackpot symbol random number in the preliminary determination process, and FIG. 30C shows a reach in the preliminary determination process. A configuration example of random numbers is shown respectively.

Referring to FIG. 30A, the jackpot random number in the prior determination process has the same configuration as the jackpot random number in the jackpot determination process shown in FIG. In other words, two types of game states of the pachinko gaming machine 100 are set: a jackpot with a low probability state and a jackpot with a high probability state. The range of random numbers is 300 from 0 to 299 in all cases. The winning probability in the prior determination is 1/300 in the low probability state and 10/300 (= 1/30) in the high probability state.
In addition, the determination as to whether or not a small hit is made when there is a shift in the special symbol lottery has the same configuration as the random number shown in FIG. That is, the winning probability per small is 3/300 (= 1/100) regardless of the low probability state or the high probability state.

  Referring to FIG. 30B, the jackpot symbol random number in the prior determination process has the same configuration as the jackpot symbol random number in the jackpot determination process shown in FIG. That is, as a type of jackpot based on a special symbol triggered by winning the first starting port 121, a jackpot of low probability symbol A, a jackpot of low probability symbol B, a jackpot of high probability symbol A, a jackpot of high probability symbol B Five types of jackpots and jackpots of latent patterns are prepared. In addition, as a type of jackpot based on a special symbol triggered by winning the second starting port 122, a jackpot of low probability symbol A, a jackpot of low probability symbol B, a jackpot of high probability symbol A, a jackpot of high probability symbol B Four types of jackpots are available.

  The range of the random number value is 250 from 0 to 249 regardless of which of the first start port 121 and the second start port 122 is won. In addition, for the high probability symbol A and the high probability symbol B, different winning values are set depending on whether the first starting port 121 is won or the second starting port 122 is won, and the winning probabilities are different. .

  Referring to FIG. 30 (c), the reach random number in the prior determination process has the same configuration as the reach random number in the variation pattern selection process shown in FIG. 17 (c). That is, the range of random number values is 250 from 0 to 249, 22 random numbers are assigned to the lottery result (with reach) for performing the reach effect, and 228 to the lottery result (without reach) for the reach effect. Random number values are assigned. Therefore, when the special symbol lottery is not a big hit, it is determined by the prior determination that the reach effect is performed with a probability of 8.8 / 100 (= 22/250).

[Preliminary judgment processing by game control unit]
FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the contents of the pre-determination process (S605 and S611 in FIG. 6) according to the present embodiment.
In the flowchart shown in FIG. 31, the game control unit 200 determines whether or not the internal state is a high probability state (S3101). If the game control unit 200 determines that the internal state is a high probability state (Yes in S3101), the start port switch process (FIG. 6). It is determined how many times the jackpot lottery right acquired in (see) corresponds to the right of the jackpot lottery after the current high probability state is shifted.

  That is, if the winning of the jackpot that the gaming state after the jackpot game becomes a high probability state (in the example shown in FIG. 30B, the jackpot of the high probability symbol A and the jackpot of the high probability symbol B) is confirmed, the jackpot is won. The number N of fluctuations at that time is set to the reference number M. For example, when the jackpot of the high probability symbol A is won by the 200th jackpot lottery (special symbol fluctuation display) after turning on the power, the data “200” is stored in the RAM 203, and accordingly When the internal state is high probability, it becomes a short game state. Therefore, the jackpot lottery performed at the 201st time after turning on the power corresponds to the first jackpot lottery after shifting to the high probability short-time gaming state, and similarly, the jackpot lottery performed at the 210th time The lottery corresponds to the tenth jackpot lottery after shifting to the high probability short-time gaming state. In this way, it is calculated how many jackpot lotteries the right of the jackpot lottery acquired by the start port switch process (see FIG. 6) corresponds to the high probability short-time gaming state. Specifically, the game control unit 200 obtains the calculated value Z by subtracting the reference number M from the variation number N (S3102).

Then, the game control unit 200 determines whether or not the calculated value Z is equal to or less than the predetermined number X (S3103). The predetermined number of times X here is the upper limit number of times that a big hit random number is determined based on the high probability state hit determination table (see FIG. 30A).
Here, for example, if the winning state where the gaming state after the jackpot game becomes the high probability short-time gaming state is won, then the jackpot random number is determined based on the hit determination table for the high probability state with the upper limit being 100 times. Think about the case. In this case, the predetermined number of times X is set to 100, and it is determined whether or not the calculation value Z is 100 or less.
That is, whether the jackpot random number acquired by the start switch processing (see FIG. 6) is determined based on the hit determination table for the high probability state, or for the low probability state when the high probability short-time gaming state ends. Here, it is determined whether the determination is made based on the winning determination table (see FIG. 30A).
For example, suppose that the winning jackpot of the high-probability symbol A (the long win that becomes the short game state at the high probability) is won by the 200th jackpot lottery (number of fluctuations N = 200) after the power is turned on. Thereafter, 98 jackpot lotteries were performed after entering the high-probability short-lived gaming state, and in a situation where the jackpot has not been won yet, the number of changes N = 299 hold A, the number of changes N = 300 hold B, Assume that the hold C with the number of fluctuations N = 301 is stored in the RAM 203. At this time, since the reference number M = 200 is set, the hold A is the calculated value Z = 99, the hold B is the calculated value Z = 100, and the hold C is the calculated value Z = 101. Therefore, hold A and hold B are determined as “YES” in S3103, and hold C is determined as “NO” in S3103.
In this way, the processing of S3102 and S3103 makes it possible to make a jackpot determination based not on the current internal state but on the internal state at the time of special symbol processing. Therefore, an accurate determination result can be derived even when the gaming state changes from the high probability state to the low probability state.

When the game control unit 200 determines that the calculated value Z is equal to or smaller than the predetermined number of times X (Yes in S3103), next, pre-determination information related to “big hit” for changing the internal state after the big hit game to a low probability state is obtained. Then, it is determined whether or not it is stored before the start port switch process (see FIG. 6) is started (S3104). This is because if such a holding ball is put on hold first, the gaming state becomes a low probability state when digesting the holding ball put on hold in the start port switch process (see FIG. 6). It is.
Therefore, when it is determined No in S3104, the hit determination table for the high probability state is selected (S3106), and when it is determined Yes in S3104, the hit determination table for the low probability state is selected. (S3107).

On the other hand, when the current gaming state is a low probability state (No in S3101), or when it is determined that the calculated value Z exceeds the predetermined number X even if the current gaming state is a high probability state (S3103). No) performs the following process. In other words, the game control unit 200 stores in the storage area 204 (see FIG. 28) of the RAM 203 the advance determination information related to the jackpot for changing the gaming state after the jackpot game to a high probability state, and the start port switch process (see FIG. 6). It is determined whether it is stored before starting (S3105). For example, in S605 of the start port switch process (see FIG. 6), when random numbers are stored in the sixth storage unit 204f (see FIG. 28) of the storage area 204, the first storage unit 204a to the fifth storage unit 204e ( 28), it is determined whether or not prior determination information relating to one of the jackpots that are in a high probability state is stored. That is, it is determined whether there is a reserve sphere that is digested earlier than the currently generated reserve sphere in the start port switch process (see FIG. 6) changes the internal state to the high probability state. This is because if such a holding ball exists first, the internal state becomes a high probability state when digesting the holding ball generated this time in the start port switch process.
Therefore, when it is determined No in S3105, the hit determination table for the low probability state is selected (S3107), and when it is determined Yes, the hit determination table for the high probability state is selected (S3106). ).

  Although not shown in detail, in S3104 and S3105, the storage area 204 includes a jackpot for changing the gaming state after the jackpot game to a high probability state and a jackpot for changing the gaming state after the jackpot game to a low probability state. When stored in (see FIG. 28), the game control unit 200 makes the above determination (S3104, S3105) based on the prior determination information related to the reserved ball to be digested later among these two jackpots. Do.

  As described above, the processing of S3104 and S3105 makes it possible to determine the jackpot based on the internal state during the special symbol processing. Therefore, even when the internal state changes from the high probability state to the low probability state, or when the internal state changes from the low probability state to the high probability state, an accurate prior determination result can be derived.

  Thereafter, the game control unit 200 determines each random number based on the selected determination table (S3108), and stores the determination result in the storage area 204 (see FIG. 28) as prior determination information (S3109). Then, it is determined whether or not the determination result is a big hit or a small win (S3110). If it is a big win or a small win (Yes in S3110), a prefetch result notification command (indicated as simply a notification command in the figure). ) Is set (S3111), and if it is a loss (No in S3110), a normal command is set (S3112), and the preliminary determination process ends. The normal command is a command for displaying only the number of holds without notifying the result of the prior determination (prefetching) in a hold display effect described later. These set commands are included in the pending number increase command (see S606 and S612 in FIG. 6), and are transmitted to the effect control unit 300 in the output process (see S506 in FIG. 5-3).

  It is also conceivable to employ control not shown in FIG. 31 in the prior determination process. For example, when it is a loss (No in S3110), it is determined whether or not a reach effect is performed during the change, and a reach command is set when it is determined that a reach effect is performed. In addition, when it is determined in advance that it is a jackpot (Yes in S3110), the type of jackpot is determined in advance.

[Preliminary production by production control unit]
In the pachinko gaming machine 100, when a game ball wins further to the starting port during a special symbol change and a holding ball is generated, the first special symbol hold display on the display 130 (see FIGS. 1 and 2). Display according to the number of holdings is performed by the device 218 and the second special symbol holding display 219. Further, in addition to the display by the display device 130, the pachinko gaming machine 100 performs an effect (holding display effect) for displaying information (presence / absence, number of holds, etc.) regarding the reserved ball on the image display unit 114 as a part of the effect display. There is. Furthermore, when a preliminary determination is made regarding the holding ball as described above, a notice effect that informs or suggests the determination result can be performed. In order to perform this notice effect, the effect control unit 300 performs the notification command reception process.

  As described above, the notification command and the normal command are sent from the game control unit 200 to the effect control unit 300 in the pending number increase command. Therefore, in the command reception process (see S1911 of FIG. 19-2 and FIG. 20), when the hold number increase command is received, the effect control unit 300 sets the hold number addition and the hold number command (S2001). In addition, the notification command or the normal command is extracted from the pending number increase command and stored in the RAM 303.

[Notification command acceptance processing]
FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the contents of notification command reception processing by the effect control unit 300.
After the processing at the time of reception of the above-described hold number increase command, the effect control unit 300 determines whether or not the notification command extracted from the hold number increase command is stored in the RAM 303 (S3201). When it is determined that the notification command is stored (Yes in S3201), the effect control unit 300 stores the storage areas (first to fourth storage units 305a to 305d and first to fourth storage units) corresponding to the current reserved ball in the RAM 303. In any of 306a to 306d), the hold flag and the notification flag are turned ON. When a normal command is extracted from the hold number increase command instead of the notification command, only the hold flag is turned ON (S3202). If the notification command is not stored (No in S3201), the notification command reception process is terminated.

  Next, the effect control unit 300 determines whether the notification flag is ON in any of the first to fourth storage units 305a to 305d and the first to fourth storage units 306a to 306d of the RAM 303 (S3203). ). When it is determined that the notification flag is ON in any of the storage units 305a to 305d and 306a to 306d (Yes in S3203), the effect control unit 300 next determines whether the variation time T is greater than the predetermined value K. It is determined whether or not (S3204). If it is determined that the variation time T is greater than the predetermined value K (Yes in S3204), a notification effect command for performing a notification effect (notification effect) is set (S3205), and a notification command reception process is performed. Exit.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the notification flag is not ON in any of the first to fourth storage units 305a to 305d and the first to fourth storage units 306a to 306d (No in S3203), the fluctuation time T is a predetermined value K. When it is determined that it is the following (No in S3204), the effect control unit 300 sets a normal effect command for performing a normal effect that does not notify the prefetch result (S3206), and ends the notification command receiving process.

  Note that these commands are for informing the player of the number of holds in the effect control process, and individual information for each hold ball (whether the hold ball is the first start port 121 or the second start port 122) , And the number of the holding ball at each starting port). The notification effect command also includes information indicating which of the first to fourth storage units 305a to 305d and the first to fourth storage units 306a to 306d has the notification flag turned on.

  More specifically, the variation time T referred to here is a time during which the special symbol varies due to the jackpot determination process (see FIG. 9), and can also be referred to as a variation time related to the variation. Further, the predetermined value K is a value larger than the time (scale) necessary for performing the notice effect. For example, when the scale of the notice effect to be executed is 3 seconds, a value of 4 seconds may be adopted as the predetermined value K. This is because the notice effect cannot be performed during the symbol change unless the fluctuation time T is longer than the scale of the notice effect to be executed. Therefore, even when the notification flag is ON in any of the first to fourth storage units 305a to 305d and the first to fourth storage units 306a to 306d, the variation time T is equal to or less than the predetermined value K. Is set not a notification effect command but a normal effect command (see S3203, S3204, and S3206).

  Note that the variation time T is not necessarily limited to one special symbol variation time (a time during which a special symbol variation relating to one winning ball (holding ball) is performed). That is, as the fluctuation time T, a time during which the symbol fluctuation is performed a plurality of times (two or three times when the upper limit of the number of holdings is four) can be set. In other words, the time obtained by adding a plurality of fluctuation times becomes the value H. In this case, the effect is performed as a notice effect (so-called continuous notice) performed over a plurality of symbol variations.

  When the notice effect spans multiple symbol variations, not only guarantees the lower limit of the entire variation time T as shown in S3104 of FIG. 31, but also the overall effect against the scale of the notice effect (continuous notice). In order for the length of the fluctuation time T not to be excessive, it is necessary to limit the fluctuation time in the symbol fluctuation that is the target of the notice effect.

[Moving character 115]
Next, the above-described movable accessory 115 (see FIG. 1) will be described.
The movable accessory 115 is configured to take a motion effect (motion effect) and a light effect (light effect) among the effects performed by the pachinko gaming machine 100 (see FIG. 1). It is located in front of the image display unit 114 in a plan view.
The game board main body constituting a part of the game board 110 is not a veneer (plywood, wood) but a resin-made plate member that transmits light, and is a so-called transparent game board. For this reason, the player can also visually recognize the portion of the movable accessory 115 on the rear side of the game board 110.
In other words, the game board main body is made of polycarbonate (PC) in which an uneven shape and a notch shape are integrally formed by molding. It is also conceivable to apply the game board body to the case where an uneven plate shape or a cutout shape is formed by cutting an acrylic plate material as a material.
Hereinafter, each of the modeling movable body 4 (see FIG. 1), the vehicle-type robot unit 5 (see FIG. 1), and the title logo unit 7 (see FIG. 1) constituting a part of the movable accessory 115 will be described in order.

[Modeling movable body 4 of movable accessory 115]
First, the modeling movable body 4 of the movable accessory 115 will be described. That is, the configuration of the modeling movable body 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. 33-1 and 33-2, and various mechanisms and motion effects will be described.

[Configuration of modeling movable body 4]
FIG. 33-1 is a diagram illustrating the modeling movable body 4 of the movable accessory 115. In the same figure, the positional relationship between the elements which comprise the modeling movable body 4 is demonstrated, and the accommodation state is shown. (A) of the same figure is a top view of the modeling movable body 4 in the accommodation state, (b) is the front view.
As shown in (a) or (b) of the figure, the modeling movable body 4 is located on the body portion 4a extending in the left-right direction, the right position portion 4b located on the right side of the front view, and on the left side of the front view. And a left position portion 4c. Moreover, the modeling movable body 4 is comprised including the base part not shown for hold | maintaining the main-body part 4a. The main body portion 4a, the right position portion 4b, and the left position portion 4c are configured to be movable with respect to the game board 110 (see FIG. 1), while a base portion (not shown) is fixed to the game board 110. Has been.

Here, as shown to (b) of FIG. 33-1, the modeling movable body 4 is made into the center area | region by the front view, the right area | region on the right side from a center area | region, and the left area | region on the left side from a center area | region. , The main body 4a is located in all of the central region, the right region, and the left region.
On the other hand, the right position portion 4b is located in the central area and the right area, and is not located in the left area. More specifically, the right position portion 4b in the stored state is positioned so as to cover the main body portion 4a located in the central region and the right region.
The left position portion 4c is located in the central area and the left area, and is not located in the right area. More specifically, the left position portion 4c in the stored state is positioned so as to cover a portion of the main body portion 4a located in the left region. Further, the left position portion 4c in the stored state has a portion covered with the right position portion 4b.
As a supplementary explanation, according to the figure, the left position portion 4c appears only in the left region, but has a portion located in the central region hidden by the right position portion 4b. It does not appear in the figure.

By the way, as shown to (a) of FIG. 33-1, the right position part 4b of the modeling movable body 4 is located in the front side in the front-back direction with respect to the main-body part 4a. More specifically, the right position part 4b is located in front of the front surface of the main body part 4a. That is, the right position portion 4b is located in front of the main body portion 4a and is not located behind the main body portion 4a.
Further, a part of the left position portion 4c is located in front of the main body portion 4a in the front-rear direction. The left position portion 4c has a portion located in the main body portion 4a. The left position portion 4c is not located behind the main body portion 4a.

Further, when the modeling movable body 4 is in the housed state, as shown in FIG. 33-1 (b), the right position portion 4b is substantially the same position as the main body portion 4a in the vertical direction.
The left position portion 4c is located on the lower side in the vertical direction as compared with the right position portion 4b.
Note that the modeling movable body 4 can be shifted from the housed state to another state in which the outer shape greatly changes, and when the state is shifted to such another state, the above-described horizontal and vertical positional relationships change. It is configured as follows.

FIG. 33-2 is an exploded perspective view of the modeling movable body 4.
As shown in the figure, the main body 4a constituting a part of the modeling movable body 4 has a plate shape extending in the left-right direction. The main body 4a includes a decorative member 411 whose front surface is decorated, and a horizontally long member 412 which is positioned behind the decorative member 411 and is connected to the decorative member 411 and is elongated. The main body 4a is attached to the horizontally long member 412, and includes an upper arm member 413 fixedly attached to the horizontally long member 412 at a position near the left end of the horizontally long member 412.
The decorative member 411 and the horizontally long member 412 are held by a base portion (not shown) at each of the right end and the left end in a front view. The decorative member 411 and the horizontally long member 412 can move up and down with respect to a base portion (not shown). The decorative member 411 includes a light source (not shown) for light effects.
In addition, in the present embodiment, the main body portion 4a is integrally formed by connecting a plurality of members, that is, the decorative member 411 and the horizontally long member 412 to each other, but may be configured by a single member. It is done.

A protruding piece 413 a is formed on the upper arm member 413. The projecting piece 413a has a planar shape with a three-dimensional cylindrical shape as a motif, and is formed so as to be recognized as a cylindrical shape when viewed obliquely.
The protruding piece 413a is formed such that a center line 413ax extending in one direction exists (see FIG. 33-9).

In the modeling movable body 4, the right position portion 4 b located on the front side of the main body portion 4 a includes a plate-like member 421 serving as a main body, and various decorative members are attached to the surface of the plate-like member 421. Yes.
The plate-like member 421 in the right position portion 4b is held by a base portion (not shown) at the right end when viewed from the front, and is slidable with respect to the main body portion 4a at a position closer to the left end when viewed from the rear side of the plate-like member 421. It is held and so-called cantilever. The plate-like member 421 can move up and down with respect to a base portion (not shown).

Further, the right position portion 4 b includes a movable angle member 422 that can move relative to the plate-like member 421. More specifically, the movable angle member 422 is attached to a base portion (not shown), and protrudes above the plate-like member 421 as the plate-like member 421 moves relative to the main body portion 4a. . In other words, the movable angle member 422 has a housed state hidden behind the plate-like member 421 and a protruding state protruding above the plate-like member 421. The movement of the movable angle member 422 relative to the plate-like member 421 is performed with the movement of the plate-like member 421, and the driving force of the drive source is not directly input to the movable angle member 422. .
In other words, when the movable angle member 422 is in a protruding state, it is attached to a base portion (not shown) so that it can slide downward according to an external force that is pressed down from above. .

Further, the left position portion 4c of the modeling movable body 4 includes a forearm member 431 and a fist member 432 that are rotatably held by the horizontally long member 412 of the main body portion 4a. The forearm member 431 of the left position portion 4c is a plate-like member and includes a light source (not shown) for light effects. In addition, the forearm member 431 of the left position part 4c comprises an arm part with the upper arm member 413 of the main-body part 4a.
Further, the fist member 432 is a member having a more three-dimensional shape than the forearm member 431. More specifically, the fist member 432 has a thickness compared to the forearm member 431 and protrudes to the front side in the front-rear direction as a whole.
The forearm member 431 and the fist member 432 include a light source (not shown) for a light effect. Therefore, various wirings for sending electric power and signals to the forearm member 431 and the fist member 432 are provided.

Here, as described above, the front side of the body portion 4a, the right position portion 4b, and the left position portion 4c of the modeling movable body 4 is three-dimensionally modeled. More specifically, the right position portion 4b bears the head, right shoulder, and left shoulder of the specific character (see (a) or (b) in FIG. 33-7), and the main body portion 4a is the specific character. The left position part 4c bears the upper arm, the forearm and the fist of the right arm of the specific character (see (a) or (b) of FIG. 33-11). ). And when the right position part 4b etc. of the modeling movable body 4 are seen, it can recognize visually that it is a thing of a specific character.
As will be described later, in the modeling movable body 4, the portion of the main body portion 4a hidden behind the right position portion 4b appears, and the left position portion 4c can move in the right direction (for example, FIG. 33-). 11), it is possible to visually recognize the specific character more clearly by looking at the state in which the outer shape is greatly changed.

[Mechanism of modeling movable body 4]
Next, various mechanisms provided in the modeling movable body 4 will be described. More specifically, the modeling movable body 4 includes an elevating mechanism 4d for elevating the main body portion 4a, an elevating mechanism 4e for elevating the right position portion 4b, and a rotating mechanism 4f for rotating the left position portion 4c. And. Hereinafter, each of the elevating mechanism 4d, the elevating mechanism 4e, and the rotating mechanism 4f will be described.
The modeling movable body 4 includes a mechanism (not shown) that allows the movable angle member 422 (see FIG. 33-2) of the right position portion 4b to move up and down with respect to the main body portion 4a.

[Elevating mechanism 4d of modeling movable body 4]
The elevating mechanism 4d for the main body 4a provided in the modeling movable body 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. 33-3, 33-4, and 33-5.
FIGS. 33-3 to 33-5 are diagrams for explaining an elevating mechanism 4d for elevating the main body portion 4a. That is, FIG. 33-3 is a front view showing the elevating mechanism 4d, and shows the main body portion 4a with a two-dot chain line. (A) in FIG. 33-3 shows a state where the main body 4a is located at the upper end, and (b) shows a state located near the lower end. FIG. 33-4 is an exploded perspective view showing a part of the right lifting mechanism 4d1 included in the lifting mechanism 4d, and FIG. 33-5 shows a part of the left lifting mechanism 4d2 included in the lifting mechanism 4d. It is a disassembled perspective view.

As shown in FIGS. 33-3 (a) and (b), the elevating mechanism 4d includes a right shaft 441 positioned at the right end of the main body portion 4a and a left shaft 442 positioned at the left end of the main body portion 4a. ing. Both the right shaft 441 and the left shaft 442 are held by a base portion (not shown) so as to extend in the vertical direction and be substantially parallel to each other.
The right shaft 441 constitutes a part of the right elevating mechanism 4d1, and the left shaft 442 constitutes a part of the left elevating mechanism 4d2.

  As shown to (a) of FIG. 33-3, the right raising / lowering mechanism 4d1 is provided with the right guide part 443 guided to the right shaft 441 along an axial direction, and the left raising / lowering mechanism 4d2 is attached to the left shaft 442. A left guide portion 444 that is guided along the axial direction is provided. The right guide portion 443 is configured integrally with the main body portion 4a, and the left guide portion 444 is configured integrally with the main body portion 4a.

  The right elevating mechanism 4d1 of the elevating mechanism 4d is operated by the driving force of the motor 4d11, and has a configuration for realizing such a configuration. The left elevating mechanism 4d2 is operated by the driving force of the motor 4d21, and has a configuration for realizing such a configuration.

  The configuration of the right elevating mechanism 4d1 shown in FIG. 33-4 includes a spur gear 4d12 attached to the output shaft of the motor 4d11, a gear 4d13 meshing with the spur gear 4d12, a large gear 4d14 meshing with the gear 4d13, and a large gear 4d14. And a longitudinal member 4d15 that is rotatably attached with a pin using a through hole 4d141 formed in the end face of the. The through-hole 4d141 of the large gear 4d14 is at a position different from the rotation center position, and can also be called an eccentric hole (see also FIG. 33-4).

The longitudinal member 4d15 of the right elevating mechanism 4d1 has a through hole 4d151 used to connect to the large gear 4d14 and a through hole 4d152 used to connect to the rod-like member 4d16. That is, the longitudinal member 4d15 is connected to the large gear 4d14 via a pin at the through hole 4d151 at the upper end, and is connected to the rod-like member 4d16 via the pin at the through hole 4d152 at the lower end.
This rod-shaped member 4d16 has a shaft portion (rotation center point) serving as a rotation center at one end portion and a hole for attaching a pin to the other end portion. Further, the rod-shaped member 4d16 is located in an intermediate portion between one end and the other end, and has a pin through hole 4d161 inserted into the through hole 4d152 of the longitudinal member 4d15.

  The pin attached to the other end of the rod-like member 4d16 penetrates through the guide hole 4d171 formed in the restricting member 4d17. In other words, the pin engages with the guide hole 4d171 of the regulating member 4d17 via the holder 4d18, and the moving direction is regulated.

  In the right elevating mechanism 4d1 for the main body 4a configured as described above, the driving force of the motor 4d11 is transmitted to the spur gear 4d12, the gear 4d13, and the large gear 4d14, and the large gear 4d14 rotates. Accordingly, the position of the longitudinal member 4d15 connected to the large gear 4d14, for example, with respect to the motor 4d11 changes. The posture of the rod-like member 4d16 connected to the longitudinal member 4d15 changes within a range allowed by the regulating member 4d17.

  The rod-like member 4d16 has a detection piece 4d162 for position detection. The detection piece 4d162 is used for detection by the photosensor PS1 (see FIG. 33-3). Based on the detection result of the photosensor PS1, it is possible to detect the state of the right portion of the main body 4a (origin position detection or moving end position detection).

The configuration of the left elevating mechanism 4d2 shown in FIG. 33-5 is common to the configuration of the right elevating mechanism 4d1 of FIG. 33-4 described above. That is, the configuration of the left elevating mechanism 4d2 includes a spur gear 4d22 (corresponding to the spur gear 4d12) attached to the output shaft of the motor 4d21 and a large gear 4d23 (corresponding to the large gear 4d14) meshing with the spur gear 4d22. .
The left elevating mechanism 4d2 includes a longitudinal member 4d24 (corresponding to the longitudinal member 4d15) formed with a pin through hole 4d241 to be inserted into a through hole 4d231 formed on the end face of the large gear 4d23, and a longitudinal member. And a rod-shaped member 4d25 (corresponding to the rod-shaped member 4d16) in which a through-hole 4d251 for a pin inserted into the through-hole 4d242 formed in 4d24 is formed.
The left elevating mechanism 4d2 includes a guide hole 4d26 (corresponding to the guide hole 4d171) for guiding a pin attached to the rod-shaped member 4d25, and a holder 4d27 (corresponding to the holder 4d18) that engages with the pin guided by the guide hole 4d26. ) And.

In the left elevating mechanism 4d2 for the main body 4a configured as described above, the driving force of the motor 4d21 is transmitted to the spur gear 4d22 and the large gear 4d23, and the large gear 4d23 rotates and is connected to the large gear 4d23. The position of the longitudinal member 4d24, for example, with respect to the motor 4d21 changes. The posture of the rod-like member 4d25 connected to the longitudinal member 4d24 is changed within the range allowed by the guide hole 4d26.
The detection piece 4d252 of the rod-shaped member 4d25 is detected by the photosensor PS2 (see FIG. 33-3), so that the state of the left side portion of the main body 4a can be detected (origin position detection or moving end position detection). become.

More specifically, the elevating mechanism 4d for the main body 4a realizes the elevating operation of the main body 4a by interlocking the right elevating mechanism 4d1 and the left elevating mechanism 4d2. That is, the main body 4a is moved up and down while maintaining the posture of the main body 4a by being controlled by the lamp controller 320 (see FIG. 3) so that the motors 4d11 and 4d21 are synchronized.
More specifically, as shown in FIG. 33-3, when the rod-like member 4d16 of the right lifting mechanism 4d1 rotates counterclockwise and the rod-like member 4d25 of the left lifting mechanism 4d2 rotates clockwise, From the state (a) to the state (b), the main body 4a is lowered. On the other hand, when the rod-like member 4d16 rotates in the clockwise direction and the rod-like member 4d25 of the left elevating mechanism 4d2 rotates in the counterclockwise direction, the state changes from (b) to (a) in FIG. Rises.

[Elevating mechanism 4e of modeling movable body 4]
Next, the raising / lowering mechanism 4e for the right position part 4b with which the modeling movable body 4 is provided is demonstrated using FIGS. 33-6.
FIG. 33-6 is a rear view for explaining the lifting mechanism 4e for lifting and lowering the right position portion 4b. FIG. 33A shows a state positioned at the upper end, and FIG. 33B shows a state positioned near the lower end. . In addition, in the same figure, illustration of the whole main-body part 4a and the whole right position part 4b is abbreviate | omitted.
As shown to (a) and (b) of the figure, the raising / lowering mechanism 4e is attached to the right shaft 441 (refer FIG. 33-3) of the right raising / lowering mechanism 4d1. In addition, as above-mentioned, FIG. 33-3 is the front view which looked at the modeling movable body 4 from the front side, whereas FIG. 33-6 is the back side which looked at the opposite side, ie, the modeling movable body 4, from the back side. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 33-6 (a) and (b), the elevating mechanism 4e for the right position portion 4b includes a fixed rack portion 451 formed in a base portion (not shown) and a right portion integral with the main body portion 4a. A movable rack portion 452 formed in the guide portion 443. As described above, the right guide portion 443 constitutes a part of the right elevating mechanism 4d1, and is guided along the axial direction by the right shaft 441.
The elevating mechanism 4e includes a two-stage gear 453 that constitutes a part of the right position portion 4b. The two-stage gear 453 has a large gear 453a and a small gear 453b that are formed coaxially.

More specifically, the large gear 453a on the right position portion 4b side meshes with the movable rack portion 452 on the main body portion 4a side, and the small gear 453b on the right position portion 4b side is on the base portion side (not shown). It meshes with the fixed rack portion 451.
For example, consider a case where the main body 4a at the upper end position shown in FIG. 33-6 (a) is lowered by the above-described lifting mechanism 4d (see, for example, FIG. 33-3). In this case, when the movable rack portion 452 of the main body portion 4a moves downward as shown in FIG. 33-6 (b) by the driving force of the motors 4d11, 4d21 (see the same figure) of the elevating mechanism 4d, The two-stage gear 453 of the position portion 4b moves downward while rotating clockwise.
Thus, the right position portion 4b performs the lowering operation in accordance with the lowering operation of the main body portion 4a. That is, the lowering operation of the right position portion 4b is performed by the driving force of the motors 4d11 and 4d21 (see the same figure) of the elevating mechanism 4d.

  The ascending operation of the right position portion 4b is realized by substantially the same action as when the right position portion 4b performs the descending operation. That is, when the raising operation of the main body 4a is performed by the driving force of the motors 4d11 and 4d21 (see FIG. 33-3) of the lifting mechanism 4d, the raising operation of the right position portion 4b is performed by the driving force.

  The ascending operation of the right position portion 4b is realized by the driving force of the motors 4d11 and 4d21 and the urging force of a tension coil spring (not shown). The tension coil spring (not shown) here is arranged along the vertical direction, the upper end is attached to a base part (not shown), and the lower end is attached to the right position part 4b. For this reason, when the right position portion 4b is lowered by the driving force of the motors 4d11 and 4d21, the tension coil spring (not shown) becomes longer and accumulates the spring force. This spring force is used to assist the upward movement of the right position portion 4b. Thereby, it becomes possible to perform the raising operation of the right position part 4b more reliably.

  More specifically, the amount of movement during the descending operation and the ascending operation is not the same between the main body portion 4a and the right position portion 4b, but is different. That is, as shown in FIG. 33-6, the movement amount Lb of the right position portion 4b is smaller than the movement amount La of the main body portion 4a (Lb <La). The difference in the amount of movement is caused by the large gear 453a and the small gear 453b in the above-described two-stage gear 453.

[About the movement of the main body portion 4a and the right position portion 4b]
Here, FIG. 33-7 is a schematic front view illustrating the relative positional relationship between the main body portion 4a and the right position portion 4b, and illustrates the movement of the main body portion 4a and the right position portion 4b. (A) of the same figure shows the state in which the main-body part 4a exists in an upper end position, (b) shows the state in which the main-body part 4a exists in a lower end position. In the figure, illustration of the left end portion of the main body portion 4a is omitted, and illustration of the left position portion 4c is also omitted. As described above, the main body portion 4a is located behind the right position portion 4b.
As described above, since the movement amount Lb of the right position portion 4b is smaller than the movement amount La of the main body portion 4a, the main body portion 4a is at the upper end position as shown in FIGS. 33-7 (a) and (b). The main part 4a hidden by the right position part 4b in some cases (see (a) in the figure) and the main body hidden by the right position part 4b in the lower end (see (b) in the figure) The part 4a is changed.

More specifically, in the state shown in FIG. 33-7 (a), the main body portion 4a on the rear side protrudes slightly from the lower end of the right position portion 4b and is slightly visible. That is, the form of the specific character is configured only by the right position portion 4b.
On the other hand, in the state shown in (b) of the figure, the lower part of the main body 4a is largely exposed. Thereby, the main-body part 4a comprises the form of a specific character with the right position part 4b.
Note that, in (b) of the figure, a region that can be seen in the state of (a) in the figure is indicated by a hatched broken line.
In other words, the right part of the main body part 4a and the right position part 4b is made larger and the left part of the main body part 4a and the right position part 4b is made smaller so that the specific character can be seen in three dimensions. The forms of the main body portion 4a and the right position portion 4b are set.

[Rotation mechanism 4f of modeling movable body 4]
Next, the rotation mechanism 4f for the left position portion 4c included in the modeling movable body 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. 33-8, 33-9, and 33-10. The rotation mechanism 4f is exclusively for rotating the left position portion 4c with respect to the main body portion 4a, and performs rotation of 360 degrees or less, more specifically, bidirectional rotation within 90 degrees. Is for.
FIGS. 33-8 to 33-10 are diagrams illustrating a rotation mechanism 4f for rotating the left position portion 4c. That is, FIGS. 33-8 and 33-9 are front views showing the rotation mechanism 4f, in which (a) in each figure shows a state in which the left position portion 4c is at the origin position, and (b) shows a moving end. The state in the vicinity is shown. FIG. 33-10 is an exploded perspective view of the rotation mechanism 4f.
More specifically, FIG. 33-8 shows a state in which the fist member 432 constituting a part of the left position part 4c is rotated by the rotation mechanism 4f, and FIG. 33-9 constitutes a part of the left position part 4c. The forearm member 431 to be rotated is shown as being rotated by the rotation mechanism 4f. For this reason, in FIG. 33-8, the fist member 432 of the left position portion 4c is indicated by a two-dot chain line, and the illustration of the forearm member 431 of the left position portion 4c is omitted. In addition, in FIG. 33-9, the forearm member 431 at the left position portion 4c is indicated by a two-dot chain line, and the illustration of the fist member 432 at the left position portion 4c is omitted. 33-8 and 33-9, the main body portion 4a is indicated by a two-dot chain line, and the right position portion 4b (see FIG. 33-1 or FIG. 33-2) is not shown.
In addition, FIGS. 33-8 and 33-9 correspond to FIG. 33-3 for explaining the lifting mechanism 4d, and FIG. 33-10 shows FIGS. 33-4 and 33 for explaining the lifting mechanism 4d. This corresponds to -5.

Hereinafter, the fist rotation mechanism 4fb, which is a mechanism for rotating the fist member 432 of the left position portion 4c of the rotation mechanism 4f, will be described with reference to FIGS. 33-8 and 33-10. A forearm rotation mechanism 4fa that is a mechanism for rotating the forearm member 431 of 4c will be described with reference to FIGS. 33-9 and 33-10.
That is, the rotation mechanism 4f includes a fist rotation mechanism 4fb and a forearm rotation mechanism 4fa. The rotation mechanism 4f is not clearly divided into a fist rotation mechanism 4fb and a forearm rotation mechanism 4fa, and there are configurations included in both of them, but such a configuration is intentionally included in any one of the descriptions. There are things to do.

[Rotating mechanism 4fb for fist in rotating mechanism 4f]
The fist rotation mechanism 4fb constituting a part of the rotation mechanism 4f will be described.
As shown in FIGS. 33-8 and 33-10, the fist rotation mechanism 4fb of the rotation mechanism 4f is operated by the driving force of the motor 4f1, and has a structure for realizing such a structure. That is, the structure of the fist rotation mechanism 4fb includes a spur gear 4f2 attached to the output shaft of the motor 4f1, and a large gear 4f3 meshing with the spur gear 4f2. The configuration of the rotation mechanism 4f includes an arch-like member 4f4 that is rotatably attached with a pin using a through hole 4f31 formed in the end face of the large gear 4f3. The through hole 4f31 of the large gear 4f3 is at a position different from the rotation center position, and can also be called an eccentric hole (see also FIGS. 33-10).
In addition, the structure of the fist rotation mechanism 4fb includes a drive-side longitudinal member 4f5 that is rotatably attached to the main body 4a with a pin using a through hole 4f42 formed in the arch-shaped member 4f4, and a pin on the main body 4a. And a driven-side longitudinal member 4f6 that is rotatably attached.

  It can be said that the arch-like member 4f4 of the fist rotation mechanism 4fb is formed in a dogleg shape. The arch-like member 4f4 has a through hole 4f41 used to connect to the large gear 4f3 and a through hole 4f42 used to connect to the drive-side longitudinal member 4f5. That is, the arch-like member 4f4 is connected to the large gear 4f3 via a pin at the through hole 4f41 at one end, and is connected to the drive side longitudinal member 4f5 via the pin at the through hole 4f42 at the other end.

The drive-side longitudinal member 4f5 of the fist rotation mechanism 4fb is positioned at the end (one end) on the upper end side, and can be rotated to the main body 4a using the attachment hole 412a formed in the laterally long member 412 of the main body 4a. And a connecting portion 4f52 which is positioned at the lower end portion (the other end portion) and rotatably connected to the fist member 432 of the left position portion 4c. Further, the drive-side longitudinal member 4f5 has a through hole 4f53 that is located in the vicinity of the rotating portion 4f51 on the side opposite to the connecting portion 4f52 and used for connecting to the arch-like member 4f4.
Therefore, the drive-side longitudinal member 4f5 rotates around the rotating portion 4f51 by transmitting the driving force of the motor 4f1 through the spur gear 4f2, the large gear 4f3, and the arch-shaped member 4f4. Such rotation of the drive-side longitudinal member 4f5 is performed in both directions, that is, in the clockwise direction and in the counterclockwise direction, depending on the rotation direction of the motor 4f1.
More specifically, in the driving-side longitudinal member 4f5, the distance from the rotating portion 4f51 to the connecting portion 4f52 for the fist member 432 is considerably longer than the distance from the rotating portion 4f51 to the through hole 4f53. For this reason, even if the drive-side longitudinal member 4f5 is slightly moved by the driving force of the motor 4f1, the moving amount of the connecting portion 4f52 is much larger, so that the rotating mechanism 4f is made compact. However, it is possible to realize a greater movement of the fist member 432.

  The driven longitudinal member 4f6 of the rotation mechanism 4f is positioned at the upper end, and is rotatably held by the main body 4a. The rotation member 4f61 is positioned at the lower end, and the fist at the left position 4c. A connecting portion 4f62 rotatably connected to the member 432;

Here, the rotating part 4f61 in the main body part 4a is located at a position different from the rotating part 4f51 of the driving side longitudinal member 4f5 described above, and the connecting part 4f62 in the fist member 432 is connected to the driving side longitudinal member 4f5 described above. It is in a position different from the part 4f52.
More specifically, the separation distance (linear distance) between the rotating portion 4f51 and the coupling portion 4f52 in the driving-side longitudinal member 4f5 is the separation distance between the rotating portion 4f61 and the coupling portion 4f62 in the driven-side longitudinal member 4f6. It is almost the same. Further, the separation distance between the rotating portion 4f51 of the driving side longitudinal member 4f5 and the rotating portion 4f61 of the driven side longitudinal member 4f6 is such that the connecting portion 4f52 of the driving side longitudinal member 4f5 and the connecting portion 4f62 of the driven side longitudinal member 4f6. It is substantially the same as the distance between them. That is, the figure formed by sequentially connecting the position of the rotating part 4f51, the position of the rotating part 4f61, the position of the connecting part 4f52 and the position of the connecting part 4f62 is a substantially parallelogram.

  The driven side longitudinal member 4f6 connected to the fist member 432 includes a detection piece 4f63 for position detection. The detection piece 4f63 is used for detection by the photosensor PS3 (see FIG. 33-8). Based on the detection result of the photosensor PS3, the state of the fist member 432 in the left position portion 4c can be detected (origin position detection or moving end position detection).

[Forearm Rotation Mechanism 4fa in Rotation Mechanism 4f]
Of the rotation mechanism 4f, a forearm rotation mechanism 4fa that is a mechanism for rotating the forearm member 431 of the left position portion 4c will be described.
As shown in FIGS. 33-9 and 33-10, the forearm rotation mechanism 4fa of the rotation mechanism 4f includes the above-described drive-side longitudinal member 4f5 and the connection member 4f7 positioned across the horizontally long member 412 of the main body portion 4a. And an attachment member 4f8. The connecting member 4f7 is located on the front side of the horizontally long member 412, and the attachment member 4f8 is located on the back side of the horizontally long member 412.
The connecting member 4f7 of the forearm rotation mechanism 4fa is located at one end, and is connected to the rotating portion 4f71 attached using the attachment hole 412c formed in the horizontally long member 412 of the main body 4a, and the connecting portion located at the other end. 4f72.
Further, the attachment member 4f8 of the rotation mechanism 4f has a boss portion 4f81 located at one end portion. The boss portion 4f81 enters the arc groove 412d formed in the horizontally long member 412 of the main body portion 4a and is connected to the connecting portion 4f72 of the connecting member 4f7. The arc groove 412d has an arc shape centered on the attachment hole 412c.

  More specifically, the drive-side longitudinal member 4f5 of the forearm rotation mechanism 4fa is connected to the forearm member 431 of the left position portion 4c at the connecting portion 4f52 and also to the fist member 432. That is, the forearm member 431 and the fist member 432 are held via the connecting portion 4f52. More specifically, the forearm member 431 can rotate relative to the fist member 432 at the position of the connecting portion 4f52 of the drive-side longitudinal member 4f5.

Incidentally, the origin position and the moving end position of the fist member 432 rotated by such a rotation mechanism 4f are as shown in FIG. It is determined by engaging each end of the arc groove 412d. In other words, the fist member 432 can rotate by the arc length of the arc groove 412d.
In addition, at the moving end position of the fist member 432, the drive-side longitudinal member 4f5 and the driven-side longitudinal member 4f6 are closest.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 33-9 (a), in the state where the left position portion 4c is at the origin position, the line segment 431x in the forearm member 431 of the left position portion 4c is the center of the planar protruding piece 413a. It is substantially parallel to the line 413ax. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 5B, in a state where the left position portion 4c is rotated, the line segment 431x is not substantially parallel to the center line 413ax but intersects the center line 413ax. The crossing angle α between the line segment 431x and the center line 413ax shown in (b) of the figure changes so as to become the maximum value when the fist member 432 moves to the moving end ((b) of FIG. 33-11). reference).
Here, the line segment 431x of the forearm member 431 includes the position of the connecting portion 4f52 of the drive-side longitudinal member 4f5 and extends in the longitudinal direction of the forearm member 431.

[About the movement of the left position portion 4c]
Here, FIG. 33-11 is a schematic front view illustrating the relative positional relationship between the main body portion 4a and the left position portion 4c. (A) of the figure shows a state where the left position portion 4c is at the origin position, and (b) shows a state where the left position portion 4c is located near the moving end. In the figure, only the upper arm member 413 of the main body 4a is shown, and the other parts of the main body 4a are not shown.
In addition, as described above, the upper arm member 413 of the main body portion 4a is located behind the left position portion 4c. The left position portion 4c is partially hidden behind the decorative member 411 of the main body portion 4a (see FIG. 33-2). More specifically, the forearm member 431 of the left position part 4c is a plate-like member, and is partially overlapped with the upper arm member 413 of the main body part 4a in the space located behind the main body part 4a when housed. .

33-11 is for explaining the movement of the left position portion 4c, and corresponds to FIG. 33-7 for explaining the movement of the main body portion 4a and the right position portion 4b. If it adds about the movement demonstrated by each of these both figures, as mentioned above, the raising / lowering mechanisms 4d and 4e which implement | achieve the movement of the main-body part 4a and the right position part 4b drive the motors 4d11 and 4d21 (refer FIG. 33-3). Operates by force. Further, the rotation mechanism 4f that realizes the movement of the left position portion 4c is operated by the driving force of the motor 4f1 (see FIG. 33-8).
Therefore, by controlling the driving of the motors 4d11, 4d21, and 4f1, it is possible to move the main body portion 4a and the right position portion 4b and move the left position portion 4c. Another mode of movement is also possible in which only the left position portion 4c is moved without moving the position portion 4b.

The movement of the left position portion 4c will be described with reference to FIGS.
As shown in FIG. 5A, when the left position portion 4c is at the origin position, the upper arm member 413 of the main body portion 4a is hidden by the forearm member 431 of the left position portion 4c and is one of the forearm members 431. The part is hidden by the fist member 432 of the left position part 4c.
When shifting from the state shown in (a) to the state shown in (b), the fist member 432 of the left position portion 4c moves in the direction of the arrow A1, that is, in the downward direction and moves in the right direction.

When the left position portion 4c is located near the moving end, the upper arm member 413, the forearm member 431, and the fist member 432 are connected to each other as shown in FIG. One aggregate, that is, a significant aggregate.
More specifically, the right arm of the specific character appears to be pulled behind the body in (a) of the figure, and appears to extend to the front side of the body in (b) of the figure. To explain further, the upper arm member 413 and the forearm member 431 are both plate-shaped members as described above, but, for example, as shown in FIG. .

[How the right arm looks with the movement of the left position part 4c]
A description will be given of how the right arm looks (visual effect) accompanying the movement of the left position portion 4c.
As shown in (b) of FIG. 33-11, the upper arm member 413 of the main body 4a constituting the right arm of the specific character, the forearm member 431 and the fist member 432 of the left position portion 4c have different width dimensions. That is, the width dimensions of the upper arm member 413, the forearm member 431, and the fist member 432 are set so that the thickness of the arm portion of the specific character changes according to the part.

In other words, the upper arm member 413, the forearm member 431, and the fist member 432 are formed by forming a portion far from the right arm in the state shown in FIG. Use), the right arm of a specific character is given perspective. For this reason, the player who will confront the specific character has a sense of depth that does not feel so much in the state of (a) of the figure, as the arm part moves from (a) to (b) of the figure. In (b) of FIG. That is, when the upper arm portion shifts from (a) to (b) in the same figure, the illusion (realism) that the fist member 432 comes toward the player himself / herself is felt.
In this way, the right arm can be given a three-dimensional effect, although the right arm is constituted by a planar plate-like member. For this reason, the player can enjoy the effects associated with the game by learning the illusion that the fist member 432 pops out.

More specifically, as shown in (b) of FIG. 33-11, the forearm member 431 of the left position portion 4c is formed wider than the upper arm member 413 of the main body portion 4a. That is, the forearm member 431 close to the fist member 432 has a longer length (width dimension) in a direction intersecting the moving direction of the forearm member 431 than the upper arm member 413 far from the fist member 432.
Further, in the forearm member 431, the width w3 of the end portion on the side close to the fist member 432 (the lower side of (b) in the figure) is the far side from the fist member 432 (the upper side of (b) in the same figure). It is wider than the end width w2. In other words, the width dimension of the portion that appears to be located on the back side is reduced, and the width dimension of the portion that appears to be located on the near side is increased. That is, the width w1 of the upper part of the upper arm member 413 (portion close to the trunk) is smaller than the width w2 of the upper part of the forearm member 431, and the width w3 of the lower part of the forearm member 431 is larger than the width w2 ( w1 <w2 <w3).

  In the present embodiment, the right arm of the specific character is configured including the fixed upper arm member 413 and the movable forearm member 431, but other configuration examples may be employed. For example, not only the forearm member 431 but also the upper arm member 413 is movable. Also in this case, the above-described relationship between the widths w1, w2, and w3 is applied in order to give the right arm a stereoscopic effect by perspective.

More specifically, when the fist member 432 shifts from the accommodated state shown in FIG. 33A to the effect state shown in FIG. 33B, the fist member 432 moves in the direction A1 while the forearm member 431 rotates. Moving. More specifically, the forearm member 431 rotates in a direction in which the intersection angle, which is an angle at which the line segment 431x of the forearm member 431 and the center line 413ax of the protruding piece 413a of the upper arm member 413 intersect each other, increases. That is, in the accommodated state shown in FIG. 33-11 (a), the line segment 431x and the center line 413ax are substantially parallel to each other (see FIG. 33-9 (a)), and the intersection angle is small. In the effect state shown in (b) of FIG. 33-11, the line segment 431x and the center line 413ax are approximately perpendicular to each other, and the intersection angle is large.
Such a change in the crossing angle makes it possible to feel the movement of the right arm of the specific character different from the normal one, together with the magnitude relationship of the width w1, the width w2, and the width w3 described above, and can give a sense of power. become.

  In the present embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the values are increased in the order of width w1, width w2 and width w3, but conversely, there is a modification in which the width becomes smaller in the order of width w1, width w2 and width w3. Conceivable. That is, the tip is narrowest and the root is widest (w1> w2> w3). In the case of such a modification, the tip portion appears to advance in the depth direction, and a sense of depth can be given.

[Significance regarding the shape of the right arm of a specific character]
Here, when a staging body with a specific character as a motif is mounted on a pachinko gaming machine, it is difficult to make a three-dimensional shaped body because the space inside the gaming machine is narrow, and if it becomes planar, There exists a possibility that the charm of a character may fall.
Therefore, in order to make it possible to give a three-dimensional effect to the director, the following configuration is adopted.
That is, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment is a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 100) that performs a motion effect, and includes the decorative portion (for example, the upper arm member 413 of the main body portion 4a) and the decorative portion from the housed state. To the predetermined position by the moving part (for example, the fist member 432 of the left position part 4c) that moves to a predetermined position (for example, the upper arm member 413 of the main body part 4a) and the moving part (for example, the fist member 432 of the left position part 4c). When the movement is performed, a connecting portion (for example, the left position portion 4c) disposed between the decoration portion (for example, the upper arm member 413 of the main body portion 4a) and the moving portion (for example, the fist member 432 of the left position portion 4c). The forearm member 431), and the connecting portion (for example, the forearm member 431 of the left position portion 4c) when the moving portion (for example, the fist member 432 of the left position portion 4c) is in the predetermined position, Localization The length (for example, the width w3) in the direction (for example, the width direction) intersecting the direction (arrow A1) to move to is the decorative portion (for example, the upper arm member 413 of the main body portion 4a) or the connection portion (for example, the left position portion). 4c forearm member 431) is configured to be different from other connecting portions located closer to the decoration portion (for example, upper arm member 413 of main body portion 4a).

I will add about the perspective of the right arm.
The depth or stereoscopic effect of the right arm in perspective is given to the entire upper body of the specific character (see (a) or (b) of FIG. 33-7). In other words, in a specific character with a half-body posture that stands diagonally with the left shoulder in front of the opponent, the left shoulder close to the player is formed larger than the far right shoulder, and the position of the head is the right shoulder By leaning closer, the left shoulder is emphasized more than the right shoulder. Furthermore, the body of the specific character (see (b) in FIG. 33-7) is formed so that the left side portion is larger than the right side portion. It is possible to create a sense of depth.

[About the movement production by the movable modeling body 4]
Next, a motion effect of the modeling movable body 4 having the above-described configuration will be described.
FIGS. 33-12, 33-13, and 33-14 are diagrams for explaining a motion effect performed by the modeling movable body 4. That is, FIG. 33-12 and FIG. 33-13 are diagrams for explaining a motion effect (overall motion effect) performed by moving all of the main body portion 4a, the right position portion 4b, and the left position portion 4c of the modeling movable body 4. The movements are shown in time series in the order of FIGS. 33-12 (a), (b) and FIG. 33-13. Moreover, FIG. 33-14 is a figure explaining the motion effect (partial motion effect) which only the left position part 4c of the modeling movable body 4 moves, and is the order of (a) and (b) of the figure. It shows movement in time series. Note that (a) in FIG. 33-12 and (a) in FIG. 33-14 are the same as each other.
Although it is the content already demonstrated, the outline | summary is first demonstrated about each motion of the main-body part 4a in the modeling movable body 4, the right position part 4b, and the left position part 4c.

Each of the main body portion 4a and the right position portion 4b of the modeling movable body 4 can move (elevate) in the vertical direction. The right position portion 4b is configured to be interlocked with the movement of the main body portion 4a.
More specifically, when the main body 4a moves up and down, the right position portion 4b moves in the vertical direction relative to the main body 4a. That is, when the main body portion 4a moves in any one of the vertical directions, the right position portion 4b moves in the same direction with respect to the main body portion 4a. For example, when the main body portion 4a moves downward (lowers), the right position portion 4b moves downward (lowers) with respect to the main body portion 4a. When the main body 4a moves upward (rises), the right position part 4b moves upward (lifts) with respect to the main body 4a.
Further, as described above, the amounts of movement of the main body portion 4a and the right position portion 4b are different from each other, and the movement amount of the right position portion 4b is smaller than the movement amount of the main body portion 4a. In other words, the movement amount of the main body portion 4a is larger than the movement amount of the right position portion 4b. For this reason, as the main body portion 4a and the right position portion 4b that overlap each other are lowered, the overlapping region of both decreases, and the rear main body portion 4a is exposed more.

Moreover, the left position part 4c of the modeling movable body 4 can be moved in a direction different from the vertical direction, which is the moving direction of the main body part 4a. More specifically, the left position portion 4c is movable independently of the movement of the main body portion 4a and the right position portion 4b. That is, the left position portion 4c is movable regardless of whether the main body portion 4a and the right position portion 4b move in the vertical direction. For this reason, in the modeling movable body 4, the main body part 4a, the right position part 4b, and the left position part 4c cooperate with each other by moving the left position part 4c in association with the movement of the main body part 4a and the right position part 4b. It is possible to produce a moving motion. Further, it is possible to produce an effect of moving the left position portion 4c independently when the main body portion 4a and the right position portion 4b are not moving.
The left position portion 4c is rotatably attached to the main body portion 4a and is rotatable with respect to the main body portion 4a.

More specifically, a motion effect performed by the modeling movable body 4 will be described. First, the overall motion effect of the modeling movable body 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. 33-12 and 33-13, and then the partial motion effect of the modeling movable body 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. 33-14.
In the state of the origin position shown in FIG. 33-12 (a), the main body portion 4a is positioned so as to be hidden behind the right position portion 4b. When the motors 4d11, 4d21 are operated, the main body portion 4a is lowered, and the right position portion 4b is also lowered while moving less than the main body portion 4a. As a result, as shown in FIG. 5B, the main body portion 4a is exposed at the lower side of the right position portion 4b, and the decorative member 411 of the main body portion 4a is positioned at the right position so as to be continuous with the right position portion 4b. It appears below the part 4b.

In addition, when the motors 4d11 and 4d21 for the main body 4a are operated, the motor 4f1 (see (a) or (b) of FIG. 33-8) is operated, so that the left position portion 4c is moved relative to the main body 4a. And start rotating.
In addition, in the modeling movable body 4, any one or a plurality of the main body portion 4a, the right position portion 4b, and the left position portion 4c are slightly rattled on the spot so as to start moving. It is conceivable to control the motors 4d11, 4d21, 4f1. That is, it is a motion effect that reciprocates without a large position change.
In addition, it is conceivable to perform a light emission effect that shines a portion that is moving in small steps at the time of such a motion effect. More specifically, for example, when the fist member 432 of the left position portion 4c moves in small increments, an effect example that suggests the reliability by the color of light emitted (LED emission color) can be considered.

Here, the timing at which the motor 4f1 for the left position portion 4c (see FIG. 33-8) is operated at the same time (simultaneously) as the operation of the motors 4d11 and 4d21 for the main body portion 4a, as well as the main body portion 4a. It is also conceivable that the motors 4d11 and 4d21 are operated at different times. That is, in this example, the motor 4f1 for the left position portion 4c is operated before the motors 4d11, 4d21 for the main body portion 4a are operated, or is operated after the motors 4d11, 4d21 are operated. In the former case, the main body portion 4a starts to move down after the left position portion 4c starts to rotate. In the latter case, the left position portion 4c rotates after the main body portion 4a starts to move down. Will start.
Due to such a difference in operation timing, the way of viewing or feeling the motion effect of the modeling movable body 4 is different. For example, in the former case, since the thick and thick fist member 432 starts to move first, it is highly possible that the player can quickly grasp that the modeling movable body 4 performs a motion effect. On the other hand, in the latter case, although it is likely that the player can grasp that the motion production starts, it is slower than the former. From the start, the player's surprise level is likely to be higher.

Then, in cooperation with the motors 4d11, 4d21 for the main body 4a and the motor 4f1 for the left position portion 4c (see FIG. 33-8), as shown in FIG. 33-13, the fist member 432 of the left position portion 4c. Reaches the moving end. As a result, the upper arm member 413 of the main body portion 4a and the forearm member 431 and the fist member 432 of the left position portion 4c are arranged to be connected to each other, and the right arm of the specific character is elongated.
In addition, the decorative member 411 of the main body 4a protrudes greatly to the lower side of the right position portion 4b, and a complete form of the specific character is formed with the extended right arm (overall motion effect).

  As shown in FIGS. 33-12 (b) and 33-13, the movable angle member 422 (see also FIG. 33-2) of the right position portion 4b is located in the right position portion 4b in the state of the origin position. Although it is buried, it gradually jumps upward from the right position portion 4b as the main body portion 4a is lowered. As described above, there is no dedicated motor for moving the movable angle member 422, and the movable angle member 422 moves relative to the right position portion 4b by the lowering operation of the main body portion 4a.

  Also, as described above, as shown in FIG. 33-13, in the overall motion effect, the portion near the specific character in the half body state is designed to be larger and the portion far away is designed to be smaller. The specific character having a three-dimensional feeling is expressed as a motion effect of the modeling movable body 4.

Further, in the partial motion effect by the modeling movable body 4, the motors 4d11 and 4d21 are not operated, and only the motor 4f1 (see FIG. 33-8) is operated. That is, in the partial motion effect, the main body portion 4a and the right position portion 4b are not lowered, and the left position portion 4c is rotated by the motor 4f1.
More specifically, from the state of the origin position shown in FIG. 33-14 (a), the forearm member 431 and the fist member 432 of the left position portion 4c rotate while the main body portion 4a and the right position portion 4b do not move. Then, it moves downward from the side of the main body 4a.
In addition, although the case where the main-body part 4a and the right position part 4b do not move was demonstrated as a partial motion effect, the partial motion effect which the main-body part 4a and the right position part 4b moves is also considered. That is, this is an example in which the main body portion 4a and the right position portion 4b do not move to the moving end (lower end) and stop the lowering operation in the middle thereof.

[About the fist member 432 accompanying the movement of the left position portion 4c]
Next, the fist member 432 associated with the movement of the left position portion 4c will be described with reference to FIGS. FIGS. 33-15 is a figure explaining the relative positional relationship of the fist member 432 with respect to the main-body part 4a when the left position part 4c moves, (a) shows the case of this Embodiment, (b) ) Shows the case of the modification. FIG. 33-8 (a) referred to in the following description shows a state in which the left position portion 4c is at the origin position by the rotation mechanism 4f, and (b) shows a state in the vicinity of the moving end. .
Here, in the fist rotation mechanism 4fb (see FIG. 33-8) of the rotation mechanism 4f according to the present embodiment, as described above, the rotation part 4f51 of the drive-side longitudinal member 4f5 and the rotation part of the driven-side longitudinal member 4f6. 4f61 is attached to the horizontally long member 412 of the main body 4a and is fixed. Further, the connecting portion 4f52 of the driving side longitudinal member 4f5 and the connecting portion 4f62 of the driven side longitudinal member 4f6 are both attached to the fist member 432 of the left position portion 4c and are movable.

The rotation mechanism 4fb for the fist in the rotation mechanism 4f is a four-joint mechanism that forms a parallelogram by engaging the drive-side longitudinal member 4f5 and the driven-side longitudinal member 4f6 with the laterally long member 412 and the fist member 432 of the main body 4a. Configure.
That is, a part of the horizontally long member 412 including the rotating part 4f51 and the rotating part 4f61 is defined as a first link, and a part of the fist member 432 including the connecting part 4f52 and the connecting part 4f62 is defined as a second link. The portion of the drive-side longitudinal member 4f5 including the rotating portion 4f51 and the connecting portion 4f52 is a third link, and the portion of the driven-side longitudinal member 4f6 including the rotating portion 4f61 and the connecting portion 4f62 is a fourth link. . When the fist rotation mechanism 4fb is replaced with such a model having four links, the first link and the second link are opposed links, and the third link and the fourth link are opposed links. is there. In this model, the lengths of the opposite links are the same, the opposite links are always parallel, and the rotational angular velocity is the same as the other links (parallel crank).

Due to the action of the fist rotation mechanism 4fb (see FIG. 33-8) of the rotation mechanism 4f, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. The same posture is substantially maintained before and after the rotation of 4c. In other words, when the fist member 432 moves in the direction of the arrow A2, the fist member 432 rotates to the moving end position while maintaining the posture at the origin position.
The posture maintenance of the fist member 432 is the same in the case of the return operation for returning from the moving end position to the origin position.
Note that the forearm member 431 at the left position portion 4c does not maintain the posture unlike the fist member 432 when rotated by the forearm rotation mechanism 4fa (see FIG. 33-9) of the rotation mechanism 4f (see FIG. 33-11). ).

As shown in FIG. 33-15 (a), the fist member 432 of the left position portion 4c according to the present embodiment is along the lower edge portion 411a of the decorative member 411 constituting a part of the main body portion 4a. Move in the direction of arrow A2.
More specifically, when the main body portion 4a is lowered, the fist member 432 of the left position portion 4c moves along the edge on the leading side in the movement direction of the decorative member 411. Further, when the main body portion 4a is raised (returning operation), the decorative member 411 moves along the trailing edge in the moving direction.

Here, “moving along the edge” means moving in a direction along a surface having a certain area, and more specifically, along a route defined based on the shape of the decorative member 411. To move. Various forms are conceivable.
For example, a form that moves along a path defined corresponding to the outer shape or outline of the decorative member 411, or a path defined corresponding to a line as a pattern drawn on the surface of the decorative member 411. A moving form is conceivable. More specifically, the “specified route” is set so as to faithfully reproduce the shape such as the outer shape in addition to the route set by simplifying the shape such as the outer shape as shown in FIG. 33-15. It is also conceivable for the route to be.
In addition, as “moving along the edge”, as shown in FIG. 33-15, the fist member 432 moves in a position where it does not overlap with the decorative member 411 in the front view. The form which moves in the position which overlaps with the member 411 can be considered.
In addition, as "moving along the edge", as shown in FIG. 33-15, in addition to the form in which the fist member 432 is moved without being in contact with the fist member 432, the fist member 432 is contacted and moved. The form to do is also considered. For example, it is the structure which slides on the rail arrange | positioned along the periphery.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 33-15, a configuration is adopted in which the fist member 432 moves along the lower edge of the substantially longitudinal decorative member 411. However, the decorative member 411 has another shape. Various modifications are possible.
That is, instead of the decorative member 411, a configuration example including an annular (doughnut-shaped) member having a predetermined width and a space formed in the center is provided. As the annular member here, for example, in the case of an annular shape, a member having a predetermined width in the radial direction can be exemplified.
In addition, instead of the decorative member 411, a configuration example including a circular member is provided.

Such a modification will be described more specifically.
In the configuration example including an annular member, a member corresponding to the fist member 432 is located at the center of the annular member, and the member corresponding to the fist member 432 moves along the shape of the edge on the center side. An example of the direction of the movement is possible. In that case, it is conceivable that the member corresponding to the fist member 432 is configured so as to rotate itself in the central space of the annular member. More specifically, a configuration is adopted in which a rail extending in the edge direction is disposed on an annular member, and a member corresponding to the fist member 432 performs a movement of rotating along the rail.
It is also conceivable that the annular member has a divided structure. That is, it is an example of a configuration in which a plurality of components are gathered to form an annular member, forming an annular member when performing a motion effect, and when the motion effect ends, the annular member is divided, These components are accommodated.

In addition, as a configuration example including a circular member as another modification, an example of the effect of movement of the member corresponding to the fist member 432 around the circular member is conceivable. In that case, it is conceivable that the member corresponding to the fist member 432 is configured to turn around the circular member one or more times. For example, when the member corresponding to the fist member 432 rotates in one direction (for example, clockwise) and then rotates in both directions so as to rotate in the other direction (for example, counterclockwise), one direction (for example, clockwise or counterclockwise) It is possible to have variations such as rotating only in the direction).
A configuration example including a plurality of members corresponding to the fist member 432 is also conceivable. In that case, for example, an effect example in which each of the plurality of members is separated from each other and rotates around the circular member can be considered. More specifically, the plurality of members rotate in the same direction while maintaining a state in which each of the plurality of members is located at substantially equal intervals. In the case where two members corresponding to the fist member 432 are provided, this is a configuration example in which each of the plurality of members is in a position facing each other. For example, when one member is at the 3 o'clock position on the dial of the watch in front view, the other member is at the 9 o'clock position.

In this way, the fist member 432 of the left position portion 4c that rotates is moved along the periphery of the decorative member 411 of the main body portion 4a that moves up and down. Then, during the movement, the fist member 432 maintains the posture with respect to the decorative member 411.
The movement in which the fist member 432 maintains its posture brings about the illusion that the fist member 432 is directed toward the player, along with the way the right arm looks using the perspective method described above. Further, such a movement of the fist member 432 is a special thing that seems strange or uncomfortable at first glance. Therefore, it is possible to execute an effect that will leave an impression on the player.

Further, the modification shown in FIG. 33-15 (b) is not a parallel crank employed in the fist rotation mechanism 4fb, but has another rotation mechanism (for example, a rotation center such as the forearm rotation mechanism 4fa). ), The fist member 432 is configured to rotate. For this reason, the posture of the fist member 432 according to the modified example varies depending on the position of the main body 4a with respect to the decorative member 411 as shown in FIG.
Although the movement of the fist member 432 according to such a modification may be less likely to remain in the impression for the player than in the case of the present embodiment, by adopting a simpler structure, man-hours for model development It is possible to reduce the manufacturing cost.

  Even in the modification, the fist member 432 moves along the lower edge 411a of the decorative member 411. More specifically, the fist member 432 performs a behavior that turns around the decorative member 411. Due to the behavior of the fist member 432, it looks as if the player did a punch of a specific character.

  As the behavior of the fist member 432, the information obtained from the game control unit 200 (for example, the result of the jackpot lottery) is selected from either the case shown in (a) of FIG. 33-15 or the case shown in (b) of FIG. It is also conceivable to adopt a mechanism that can be selected according to the motion effect and execute the motion effect.

[Significance of specific character's fist movement]
Here, in order to make the player move with a movable body that makes the player feel the enjoyment of the game, a wider space is required, but it is allowed due to the increase in the size of various kinds of accessories and the increase in parts in recent years. The space is narrow and it is difficult to secure a sufficient space.
Therefore, the following configuration is adopted in order to realize the impactful movement of the movable body even in a smaller space.
That is, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment is a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 100) that executes a motion effect, and a first effect body (for example, a main body 4a) that moves and performs the motion effect. And a second effect body (for example, the left position portion 4c), and when the second effect body (for example, the left position portion 4c) moves relative to the first effect body (for example, the main body portion 4a), The second effect body (for example, the left position portion 4c) moves along a route (for example, arrow A2) defined based on the shape of the first effect body (for example, the main body portion 4a). It is.

[Wiring structure of modeling movable body 4]
Next, the wiring with which the modeling movable body 4 is provided is demonstrated.
FIG. 33-16 is a schematic perspective view illustrating a wiring structure provided in the modeling movable body 4.
As shown in the figure, the modeling movable body 4 includes substrates 4101, 4102 attached to the main body portion 4a, and substrates 4201, 4202, 4203 attached to the right position portion 4b. The modeling movable body 4 includes a substrate 4001 attached to a base member (not shown).

These substrates 4101, 4102, 4201, 4202, 4203, 4001 are connected by various flat cables constituting a power feeding system and / or a signal system. That is, the base member (not shown) substrate 4001 and the right position portion 4b substrate 4201 are electrically connected to each other by the flat cable 4301. Further, the substrate 4201 in the right position portion 4b and the substrate 4101 in the main body portion 4a are electrically connected to each other by a flat cable 4302.
In the right position portion 4b, the substrate 4201 and the substrate 4202 are connected by a flat cable 4303, and the substrate 4201 and the substrate 4203 are connected by a flat cable 4304.
In the main body 4a, the substrate 4101 and the substrate 4102 are connected by a flat cable 4305.

  As described above, the substrate 4201 in the right position portion 4b is supplied with power and signals from the base member (not shown) through the flat cable 4301, and the substrate 4101 in the main body portion 4a is supplied with power and signals through the flat cable 4302. Has been. In other words, a configuration in which power and signals are directly supplied to the main body portion 4a from the substrate 4001 of a base member (not shown) is not used, but a configuration in which the power is supplied to the main body portion 4a via the right position portion 4b is adopted. .

In addition, with respect to the left position part 4c of the modeling movable body 4, a power feeding system and / or a signal system are configured using a wire (not shown) instead of a flat cable. More specifically, a wire (not shown) is disposed along a groove formed on the back surface of the drive-side longitudinal member 4f5 (see FIGS. 33-8 to 33-10) that constitutes a part of the rotation mechanism 4f. Has been.
For this reason, illustration of a wire (not shown) connected to the left position portion 4c of the modeling movable body 4 is omitted in FIGS. 33-16.

[Significance of wiring structure of modeling movable body 4]
The significance of adopting the wiring structure described above in the present embodiment will be described.
The significance of this is that by connecting units with a small relative movement amount due to the motion effect of the modeling movable body 4, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a failure due to repeated motion effects as the margin of the flat cable is secured longer. It is to suppress.

This will be described in more detail. As described above, the movement amount Lb of the right position portion 4b relative to the base member (not shown) is smaller than the movement amount La of the main body portion 4a relative to the base member (not shown) (see FIG. 33-6). For this reason, the base member (not shown) employs a configuration in which the right position portion 4b and the flat cable 4301 are connected instead of the main body portion 4a.
And about the main-body part 4a, the quantity (La-Lb) which moves with respect to the right position part 4b is less than the quantity (La) which moves with respect to a base member (not shown). For this reason, the main body portion 4a employs a configuration in which the right position portion 4b and the flat cable 4302 are connected.

  By adopting such a configuration, the flat cable length is reduced by reducing the length of the flat cable, thereby reducing the behavior of the flat cable associated with the lifting and lowering operation. The flat cable is caused by friction with other members during the repeated operation. It becomes possible to prevent breakage of.

In other words, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment is a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 100) that executes a motion effect, and moves to the gaming machine to perform the motion effect (first effect body ( For example, a main body portion 4a), a second effect body (for example, the right position portion 4b) that performs the motion effect by moving an amount smaller than the movement amount of the first effect body relative to the gaming machine, and a gaming machine Forming means (flat cables 4301, 4302) for forming a route for feeding and / or transmitting power from the main body to the first effect body and the second effect body, and the forming means (flat cable 4301). , 4302) connects the first production unit (flat cable 4301) that connects the gaming machine main body and the second effector to each other, and connects the second effector and the first effector to each other. Second to A forming section (flat cable 4302) and is characterized in that it comprises a.

[Rotation mechanism 4g as a modification of the rotation mechanism 4f of the modeling movable body 4]
Here, various modified examples of the rotation mechanism 4f included in the modeling movable body 4 can be considered. For example, the rotation mechanism 4g realizes a motion effect different from the left position portion 4c by the rotation mechanism 4f.
More specifically, the rotating mechanism 4g according to the modified example has an additional motion effect that is not provided in the rotating mechanism 4f, in addition to a motion effect that rotates around the rotation axis that is erected on the board surface of the game board 110 in the same manner as the rotating mechanism 4f. Is realized. That is, the additional motion effect mentioned here is another rotation axis extending in a direction intersecting with the rotation axis extending in the direction standing on the board surface of the game board 110 (see FIG. 1) (for example, a direction parallel to the board surface). Is performed around the moving end of the left position portion 4c. The rotating mechanism 4g includes a bending mechanism 4g1 that is a mechanism for realizing a motion effect in which the fist bends in the vicinity of the moving end.
Hereinafter, the rotation mechanism 4g including the bending mechanism 4g1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 33-17, 33-18, 33-19, 33-20, and 33-21.

FIGS. 33-17 to 33-21 are diagrams illustrating a rotating mechanism 4g according to a modification for rotating the left position portion 4c. That is, FIG. 33-17 is an exploded perspective view of the rotating mechanism 4g according to the modification, and corresponds to FIG. 33-10 in the case of the rotating mechanism 4f. FIGS. 33-18 are front views showing a rotating mechanism 4g according to a modification, where (a) shows a state where the left position portion 4c is at the origin position, and (b) shows a state where it is at the moving end. . This figure corresponds to FIGS. 33-8 and 33-9 in the case of the rotating mechanism 4f.
FIGS. 33-19 to 33-21 are diagrams for explaining the action of the bending mechanism 4g1 included in the rotation mechanism 4g. More specifically, FIG. 33-19 is a diagram showing the bending mechanism 4g1, and is a perspective view seen from the back side. FIG. 33-20 is a front view for explaining the operation of the bending mechanism 4g1. FIG. 33A shows a state where the left position portion 4c is at the origin position, for example, and FIG. 33B shows a state where it is at the moving end. . FIGS. 33-21 are right side views for explaining the operation of the bending mechanism 4g1, in which (a) shows a state before bending, and (b) shows a bent state.
Note that the basic structure of the left position portion 4c operated by the rotating mechanism 4g here is common to the case of the present embodiment operated by the rotating mechanism 4f described above, but also includes different portions. This will be described below.

As shown in FIG. 33-17, the left position portion 4c to which the rotation mechanism 4g is applied includes a fist member 462 corresponding to the fist member 432 in the present embodiment (see the same figure). .
Further, as shown in FIG. 33-18, the left position portion 4c includes a forearm member 461 corresponding to the forearm member 431 (for example, see FIGS. 33-2 and 33-10). The forearm member 461 is integrally attached to a swing member 4ge described later.

As shown in FIG. 33-17, the rotating mechanism 4g includes a motor 4ga that generates a driving force, a spur gear 4gb that is attached to the output shaft of the motor 4ga, a large gear 4gc that meshes with the spur gear 4gb, and a main body portion 4a. And a drive-side longitudinal member 4gd engaged with the large gear 4gc. The rotating mechanism 4g includes a swinging member 4ge that is integrally attached to the forearm member 461 (see FIG. 33-18), is connected to the driving-side longitudinal member 4gd, and swings by the rotation of the driving-side longitudinal member 4gd.
The rotating mechanism 4g is connected to the driven side longitudinal member 4gf rotatably held by the main body 4a and the driven side longitudinal member 4gf, and is a base member capable of relative movement between the swinging member 4ge. 4 gg. The rotation mechanism 4g includes a fist back member 4gh that is positioned between the base member 4gg and the fist member 462 of the left position portion 4c and is assembled integrally with the fist member 462 on the back side of the fist member 462.

The rotation mechanism 4g is attached to the base member 4gg, a connecting member 4gi for connecting the base member 4gg and the fist back member 4gh to each other so as to be relatively rotatable, and the fist back member 4gh with respect to the base member 4gg. And a spring member 4gj that is a tension coil spring that urges in a predetermined direction.
The rotating mechanism 4g is attached to the swing member 4ge, and includes a restricting member 4gk that engages with the base member 4gg and the fist back member 4gh and restricts the mutual positional relationship between the swing member 4ge and the base member 4gg. .
The rotation mechanism 4g includes a driven longitudinal member 4gm that is rotatably held by the main body portion 4a and connected to the swing member 4ge.

Each of the elements constituting the rotation mechanism 4g will be described in more detail.
As shown in FIG. 33-17, the large gear 4gc has a pin portion 4gc1 formed on the end face of the large gear 4gc, and the drive-side longitudinal member 4gd is a long hole groove having a long hole shape extending in one direction. 4 gd3. The drive-side longitudinal member 4gd is engaged with the large gear 4gc by positioning the pin portion 4gc1 of the large gear 4gc in the long hole groove 4gd3 thereof. That is, when the large gear 4gc is rotated by the driving force of the motor 4ga, the driving side longitudinal member 4gd is rotated accordingly.
The drive-side longitudinal member 4gd has the long hole groove 4gd3 described above, a rotating portion 4gd1 positioned at one end and rotatably held by the main body portion 4a, and a swinging member 4ge positioned at the other end. And a connecting portion 4gd2 that is rotatably connected. In addition, the long hole groove 4gd3 extends in a direction toward the rotating portion 4gd1 (see FIG. 33-18).

As shown in FIG. 33-17, the swing member 4ge includes an attachment portion 4ge1 to which the connecting portion 4gd2 of the driving side longitudinal member 4gd is attached, an attachment portion 4ge2 to which the connecting portion 4gm2 of the driven side longitudinal member 4gm is attached, Have
The swing member 4ge has an arcuate groove 4ge3 that is positioned between the attachment portion 4ge1 and the attachment portion 4ge2 and engages with the protrusion 4gd4 of the drive-side longitudinal member 4gd.

The driven longitudinal member 4gf has a rotating part 4gf1 positioned at one end and rotatably held by the main body part 4a, and a connecting part 4gf2 positioned at the other end and rotatably connected to the base member 4gg. .
That is, the driven-side longitudinal member 4gf is not attached to the swing member 4ge to which the drive-side longitudinal member 4gd is connected, but is connected to the base member 4gg that can swing relative to the swing member 4ge.

As shown in FIG. 33-17, the pedestal member 4gg is coaxial with the mounting portion 4ge1 of the swinging member 4ge and has a rotating portion 4gg1 that forms the center of rotation of the pedestal member 4gg, and an arc shape centered on the rotating portion 4gg1. A notch 4gg2. More specifically, the notch 4gg2 of the base member 4gg receives the protruding portion 4gg1 of the restricting member 4gg. The restricting member 4gg is attached to the swinging member 4ge, and the protrusion 4gk1 of the restricting member 4gg is engaged with the notch 4gg2 of the base member 4gg, whereby the swinging of the base member 4gg with respect to the swinging member 4ge. The area is regulated. Note that the protrusion 4gk1 of the regulating member 4gk has a tip abutting against an inclined surface 4gh3 of a fist back member 4gh described later (see FIGS. 33-19 to 33-21).
Further, as described above, the base member 4gg is connected to the driven-side longitudinal member 4gg, and this connection is realized by connecting the connecting portion 4gg3 of the base member 4gg to the connecting portion 4gf2 of the driven-side longitudinal member 4gf. Is done.

As shown in FIG. 33-17, the fist back member 4gh includes a pin holding portion 4gh1 that holds one end of the pin and a pin holding portion 4gh2 that holds the other end of the pin. More specifically, both ends of the pin are held by the pin holding portions 4gh1 and 4gh2 of the fist back member 4gh, and the central portion of the pin is held by the connecting member 4gi attached to the base member 4gg. Accordingly, the fist member 462 and the fist back member 4gh can rotate relative to the base member 4gg around the axial direction of the pin.
Then, one end of the spring member 4gj is attached to the fist back member 4gh, and the other end is attached to the base member 4gg. As a result, the fist member 462 and the fist back member 4gh are biased in the direction in which the fist back member 4gh approaches the base member 4gg by the biasing force of the spring member 4gj. More specifically, the fingertip side of the fist member 462 is biased in the direction approaching the base member 4gg.
The fist back member 4gh has an arcuate inclined surface 4gh3 having substantially the same radius and center position as the notch 4gg2 of the base member 4gg. That is, in the assembled state, the inclined surface 4gh3 of the fist back member 4gh is in a positional relationship facing the notch 4gg2 of the base member 4gg. More specifically, the inclined surface 4gh3 is formed to uniformly incline from the fist member 462 side to the base member 4gg side, and the protruding portion 4gk1 of the regulating member 4gk contacts the inclined surface 4gh3 (for example, (See (a) of FIG. 33-19).

As described above, the spring member 4gj is a tension coil spring, and one end is attached to the fist back member 4gh and the other end is attached to the base member 4gg.
Further, as described above, the regulating member 4gk is attached to the swinging member 4ge, and has the protruding portion 4gk1 that contacts the inclined surface 4gh3 of the fist back member 4gh through the notch portion 4gg2 of the base member 4gg. .

As shown in FIG. 33-17, the driven-side longitudinal member 4gm is positioned at one end and is rotatably supported by the rotating portion 4gm1 that is rotatably supported by the main body 4a, and the swinging member 4ge that is positioned at the other end. A connecting portion 4gm2 to be connected.
In addition, the driven-side longitudinal member 4gm is not attached to the base member 4gg to which the driven-side longitudinal member 4gf is connected, but is connected to the swinging member 4ge that is relatively moved by the base member 4gg.

In addition, as described above, the drive-side longitudinal member 4gd and the driven-side longitudinal member 4gm are connected to the swing member 4ge, and the base member 4gg swingable with respect to the swing member 4ge. The driven side longitudinal member 4gf is connected.
The drive-side longitudinal member 4gd, the driven-side longitudinal member 4gf, and the driven-side longitudinal member 4gm are all rotatably attached to the main body portion 4a. That is, the positional relationship among the rotating portion 4gd1 of the driving-side longitudinal member 4gd, the rotating portion 4gf1 of the driven-side longitudinal member 4gf, and the rotating portion 4gm1 of the driven-side longitudinal member 4gm is the same even at the origin position shown in FIG. It does not change even at the moving end position shown in FIG.

Here, the assembly of the components of the rotating mechanism 4g will be briefly described.
The connecting member 4gi is attached to the base member 4gg and has a structure for holding the central portion of the pin. That is, the fist back member 4gh integrated with the fist member 462 can be assembled so as to be rotatable with respect to the base member 4gg via the connecting member 4gi and the pin. By such an assembly, a “uniaxial mechanism” in which the fist member 462 and the fist back member 4gh can rotate around the pin with respect to the base member 4gg is formed. Here, the uniaxial mechanism body refers to a state before being connected to the driven-side longitudinal member 4gf.
The uniaxial mechanism includes a base member 4gg, a fist back member 4gh, a fist member 462, a connecting member 4gi, and a pin. Further, the uniaxial mechanism is configured to include a spring member 4gj wound around the base member 4gg and the fist back member 4gh.
Then, by further assembling the uniaxial mechanism body with the swing member 4ge to which the regulating member 4gk is attached, the uniaxial mechanism body can be rotated around the attachment portion 4ge1 or the rotation portion 4gg1 with respect to the swing member 4ge, A “biaxial mechanism” having two rotation axes extending in directions intersecting each other is formed.
In such a biaxial mechanism, the drive-side longitudinal member 4gd and the driven-side longitudinal member 4gm can be attached to the swing member 4ge, and the driven-side longitudinal member 4gf can be attached to the base member 4gg.

Next, the operation of the rotating mechanism 4g configured as described above will be described.
In the state where the left position portion 4c shown in FIG. 33-18 (a) is at the origin position, when the driving force of the motor 4ga is transmitted to the spur gear 4gb and the large gear 4gc rotates, the pin portion 4gc1 of the large gear 4gc and Due to the engagement of the drive-side longitudinal member 4gd with the long hole groove 4gd3, the drive-side longitudinal member 4gd rotates counterclockwise around the rotating portion 4gd1. Then, the drive-side longitudinal member 4gd moves to the vicinity of the moving end as shown in FIG.
At this time, the driven side longitudinal member 4gf rotates in the same direction (counterclockwise) as the direction of rotation about the rotating part 4gf1 as the driving side longitudinal member 4gd rotates. Accordingly, the fist member 462 of the left position portion 4c connected to the connecting portion 4gd2 of the driving side longitudinal member 4gd and the connecting portion 4gf2 of the driven side longitudinal member 4gf is positioned below, and the position with respect to the motor 4ga is changed.

Here, paying attention to the rotating portion 4gd1 and connecting portion 4gd2 of the driving-side longitudinal member 4gd and the rotating portion 4gf1 and connecting portion 4gf2 of the driven-side longitudinal member 4gf in the rotating mechanism 4g, the fist rotating mechanism 4fb of the rotating mechanism 4f (FIG. 33). As in (-8), the parallel cranks have the same length of the opposite links.
For this reason, as shown to (a) and (b) of FIGS. 33-18, the attitude | position of the fist member 462 of the left position part 4c is maintained even if it rotates with the rotation mechanism 4g.

Further, in the driven side longitudinal member 4gm, the coupling portion 4gm2 rotates around the coupling portion 4gd2 of the driving side longitudinal member 4gd in the counterclockwise direction in accordance with the counterclockwise rotation of the driving side longitudinal member 4gd. More specifically, the connecting portion 4gm2 of the driven side longitudinal member 4gm is located on the right side of the connecting portion 4gd2 of the driving side longitudinal member 4gd at the origin position shown in FIG. In the position in the vicinity of the moving end shown in FIG.
As a result, the posture of the swinging member 4ge connected to the connecting portion 4gm2 of the driven side longitudinal member 4gm changes, and the posture of the forearm member 461 relative to the fist member 462 changes.

Here, the action of the bending mechanism 4g1 of the rotating mechanism 4g will be described with reference to FIGS. 33-19 to 33-21. The bending mechanism 4g1 includes a swinging member 4ge, a base member 4gg, a fist back member 4gh, a connecting member 4gi, a pin, a spring member 4gj, and a regulating member 4gk.
As shown in FIG. 33-19, the fist member 462 and the fist back member 4gh of the left position portion 4c are movable relative to the base member 4gg via the connecting member 4gi. That is, the fist member 462 and the fist back member 4gh can move around the pin as a rotation axis.
Then, the fist member 462 and the fist back member 4gh are pulled rearward in the front-rear direction (right side in the figure) by the biasing force of the spring member 4gj. For this reason, the inclined surface 4gh3 of the fist back member 4gh is pressed against the protrusion 4gk1 of the regulating member 4gk.
On the other hand, when the swinging member 4ge swings due to the action of the parallel crank of the driving-side longitudinal member 4gd and the driven-side longitudinal member 4gf, the relative positional relationship between the swinging member 4ge and the fistula back member 4gh changes. . As a result, the protrusion 4gk1 of the regulating member 4gk moves along the inclined surface 4gh3 of the fist back member 4gh.

The operation when the protrusion 4gk1 moves along the inclined surface 4gh3 will be described with reference to FIGS. 33-20 and 33-21.
The state shown to each (a) of both figures is a state where the fist member 462 is not bent, as shown to (a) of FIG. 33-21 (refer the figure). That is, as shown to (a) of FIG. 33-20, the protrusion part 4gk1 of the control member 4gk is located in the one end part (lower end part) of the inclined surface 4gh3. When the relative positional relationship between the swinging member 4ge and the fist back member 4gh changes, the projecting portion 4gk1 slides along the inclined surface 4gh3. As a result, the fist member 462 and the fist back member 4gh move to the rear side in the front-rear direction with respect to the base member 4gg (see FIG. 33) around the pin (see FIG. 33-19), and the bending motion starts.
When the left position portion 4c reaches the moving end (see (b) of FIG. 33-18), as shown in (b) of FIG. 33-20, the protruding portion 4gk1 is the other end (upper end) Part). When the protruding portion 4gk1 is positioned at the other end, the fist is sufficiently bent as shown in FIG. 33B, and a bending motion effect is performed by the bending mechanism 4g1.

  By applying the rotation mechanism 4g according to the modification to the left position portion 4c, it is possible to realize a motion effect that is difficult to predict from the appearance of an effect of bending a fist with a simpler configuration. That is, such a series of movements is realized by driving the rotating mechanism 4g with only the driving force of one motor 4ga (see FIG. 33-17), and can be easily controlled.

[About production in which modeling movable body 4 and image display unit 114 cooperate]
Next, an effect produced by the modeling movable body 4 and the image display unit 114 described above in cooperation with each other will be described with reference to FIGS. 33-22 and 33-23. More specifically, the fluctuating effects will be described with reference to FIGS. 33-22 and other fluctuating effects will be described with reference to FIGS. 33-23.

Such fluctuating effects are executed under the control of the effect control unit 300 (see FIG. 3), and are a series of effects from when the decorative symbol that notifies the result of the jackpot determination starts to fluctuate until it stops. A variation time is set in advance for the variation effect, and variation display and stop display are performed using the variation time.
More specifically, in such a variation effect, a so-called reach effect, a pseudo-continuous effect, and the like are performed, and at the end of the variation effect, all the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, and the result of the jackpot determination is determined.

  This will be described more specifically. When the decorative symbol is variably displayed and then stopped and displayed, one decorative symbol (for example, the decorative symbol image located at the center of the three symbols) is left variably displayed and another decorative symbol (for example, three of the three symbols is displayed). The decorative design images located at both ends are stopped and displayed first. Then, in order to be notified that the lottery result is a big hit, it is a condition that the decorative symbol image to be stopped and displayed first is the same, so the same decorative symbol image is first stopped and displayed. When one decorative symbol image is variably displayed, the player expects that the last one decorative symbol image is also stopped and displayed in the same image as the other. Such an effect using the fluctuating display state of the decorative design image is a reach effect, and various effects such as whether or not a big hit is made during the time by developing the effect by continuing the variable display state for a long time. Production is performed.

  In addition, before displaying the decorative symbol image in a variably displayed state and stopping completely, the pseudo-continuous effect is an effect of repeatedly displaying the variegated display (hereinafter referred to as a temporary stop) while making the player appear to have stopped quasi-stopping. Is done. For example, if the lottery result when the decorative symbol image is temporarily stopped does not show a big win, the player will feel disappointed with the lottery result, but in reality it has not stopped completely and re-variation starts As a result, the expectation of winning the jackpot during the change increases. If such a re-variation is repeated within one change, by setting a high degree of reliability to shift to reach production and win the jackpot, the re-variation is repeated during one change, so that The player will be further beaten as to whether or not.

As described above, the movable modeling body 4 used for the variation effect is positioned above the image display unit 114 and stands by (see (a) in FIGS. 33-1 and 33-12 or (a) in FIG. 33-14. )) When performing a motion effect, the left position portion 4c rotates and the main body portion 4a and the right position portion 4b descend (see FIG. 33-13) or the left position portion 4c rotates (FIG. 33-). 14 (b)).
When such a modeling movable body 4 operates, it comes to be positioned in front of the image display unit 114. Focusing on this operation, the modeling movable body 4 hides the image display unit 114 with different types of movement. That is, the left position portion 4c hides other display areas of the image display section 114 even in a rotation operation different from the descending action in which the main body section 4a and the right position section 4b hide the display area of the image display section 114.
First, the fluctuating effects shown in FIG. 33-22 will be described.

FIG. 33-22 is a diagram showing the fluctuating effects, and shows the scenes in the order of (a) to (h) in time series.
33-22 (a), the image display unit 114 displays the changing right symbol 40a, middle symbol 40b, and left symbol 40c, and the modeling movable body 4 is in an inoperative state. . Note that the right symbol 40a, the middle symbol 40b, and the left symbol 40c are positioned approximately at the center in the vertical direction of the image display unit 114, and are spaced apart from each other in the horizontal direction.
The image display unit 114 also displays a pedestal image 40d and a digested object 40e indicating that the reserved ball has been digested and the change is being performed near the lower center. That is, the display related to the variation is performed by the image display unit 114. In the state shown in the figure, since there is no winning ball (holding ball) for which the special symbol variation display operation is held (that is, not drawn), the holding ball for which the big hit lottery is held is displayed. Not.

In addition, it is conceivable that a part or all of the modeling movable body 4 performs a reciprocating motion (a rattling motion) while being slightly displaced at a stage before the start of the reach effect, for example. By such reciprocation, the player is aware that the variation effect may be advantageous to the player and expects the start of the reach effect, for example.
Such a reciprocating motion may be performed during symbol fluctuations other than the stage before the start of reach production.
In addition to the modeling movable body 4, such reciprocal movement may be performed on the vehicle-type robot unit 5 (see FIG. 1) and the title logo unit 7 (see FIG. 1). In that case, it is conceivable to make the conditions under which the modeling movable body 4, the vehicle-type robot section 5 and the title logo section 7 reciprocate differ. For example, before the transition to the development effect or before the transition to the pseudo-continuous effect.

  As shown in (b) of FIG. 33-22, in the decorative design of the image display unit 114, each of the right design 40a and the left design 40c stops and displays “1”, and the middle design 40b displays a variable display. Remains. That is, reach production. Furthermore, the image display unit 114 displays a button image 40f that suggests a button press request.

In response to this, when the player presses the effect button 161 (see FIG. 1 or FIG. 2), the modeling movable body 4 is activated as shown in FIG. 33-22 (c). At the same time, the position and size of the decorative design of the image display unit 114 change. That is, the main body portion 4a and the right position portion 4b of the modeling movable body 4 are lowered, and the left position portion 4c is rotated counterclockwise.
It should be noted that when the effect button 161 is not operated by the predetermined time after the button image 40f is displayed, the effect control is such that the above-described effect proceeds when the effect button 161 is pressed. It is done.

By such an operation of the modeling movable body 4, many parts of the image display unit 114 are hidden, and the area of the image display unit 114 where the decorative symbols have been displayed is also hidden. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 33-22 (d), the image display unit 114 has a region 114a hidden by the main body portion 4a of the modeling movable body 4, and only by the right position portion 4b. There is a region 114b that is hidden, and there is a region 114c that is hidden only by the left position portion 4c. For this reason, the right symbol 40a, the middle symbol 40b, and the left symbol 40c are displayed in the region 114d of the image display unit 114 that is not hidden by the modeling movable body 4 in the reach state, and the size thereof is reduced and displayed. Is done.
In FIG. 33-22 (c), the pedestal image 40d and the digested object 40e (for example, see FIG. 33A) in the image display unit 114 are not displayed. That is, when the modeling movable body 4 operates, the hold display is not displayed on the image display unit 114.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 33-22 (c), the right symbol 40a and the middle symbol are located at the end of the left position part 4c of the modeling movable body 4, that is, in the vicinity of the fist of the specific character swung down. 40b and the left symbol 40c are displayed small with a close interval therebetween. Such a cooperation effect is such that the fist of a specific character as a movable object hits the right symbol 40a, the middle symbol 40b and the left symbol 40c as image displays, and these symbols 40a, 40b and 40c are driven to the corners. Show how.
In such a case, instead of displaying the right symbol 40a, the middle symbol 40b, and the left symbol 40c, it is possible to perform the effect control to change the display of the fourth symbol, but the right symbol 40a, the middle symbol 40b and the left symbol are considered. By giving the relevance to the movement of the specific character 40c, it is possible to realize a fun presentation while watching.

Following the effect shown in (c) of FIG. 33-22, as shown in (d) of FIG. 33, the modeling movable body 4 returns to the original position. That is, the main body portion 4a and the right position portion 4b are raised, and the left position portion 4c is rotated in the clockwise direction to be in an inoperative state. On the other hand, in the image display unit 114, the right symbol 40a, the middle symbol 40b, and the left symbol 40c are displayed small in the corners of the image display unit 114, and remain in the state shown in FIG. Thus, even if the state of the modeling movable body 4 changes, the decorative design on the image display unit 114 does not change.
In (d) of the figure, the display of the pedestal image 40d and the digested object 40e which has been omitted in the image display unit 114 (for example, see (c) of the figure) is resumed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 33-22 (e), the right symbol 40a, the middle symbol 40b, and the left symbol 40c are displayed in a large size at the approximate center in the vertical direction of the image display unit 114, and the middle symbol 40b is “1” is stopped and displayed. However, such a stop display is a fake and a temporary stop display.
For this reason, the pseudo-continuous effect is started as shown in FIG. That is, “1” as the right symbol 40a, “1” as the middle symbol 40b, and “1” as the left symbol 40c displayed on the image display unit 114 start to change shape.

Eventually, as shown in FIG. 33-22 (g), the shaping movable body 4 operates and the decorative design of the image display unit 114 is hidden. Such a non-display of the decorative symbol is displayed on the image display unit 114, in addition to the case where the decorative symbol is displayed on the image display unit 114, or in addition to the case where all or a part of the decorative symbol is hidden by the activated modeling movable body 4. It is also conceivable to perform production control that does not display decorative symbols.
Such a cooperation effect makes it appear as if the fist of a specific character as a movable body is throwing away the right symbol 40a, the middle symbol 40b and the left symbol 40c as image displays and pushing them out of the image display unit 114.
In (g) in the figure, the pedestal image 40d and the digested object 40e are not displayed as in (c) in the figure.

Finally, as shown in FIG. 33-22 (h), when the modeling movable body 4 returns to its original state and becomes inoperative, the image display unit 114 displays “7” as the right symbol 40a, the middle symbol 40b. “7” as the left symbol and “7” as the left symbol 40c are displayed to notify that the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot of “777”, the variation effect ends, and the game shifts to the jackpot game.
In addition, the base image 40d and the digest object 40e are displayed on the image display part 114 shown to (h) of the figure.

FIGS. 33-23 is a figure which shows another fluctuation production, (a) And (b) represents the one scene. A part of the fluctuating effect as shown in (b) after (a) is shown.
As described above, the movable movable body 4 operates only when the specific character's torso appears or when the right arm extends, or when the right arm extends (see FIGS. 33-12 and 33-13), and only the right arm of the specific character. There are small movements or partial movements (see FIGS. 33-14).
In the case of a fluctuating effect with a large movement, the right symbol 40a, the middle symbol 40b and the left symbol 40c are displayed in the region 114d which is a region other than the regions 114a, 114b and 114c in the image display unit 114 (FIG. 33-). 22 (see for example (c) and (d)). Here, the region 114a refers to a display region hidden by the main body 4a of the modeling movable body 4, the region 114b refers to a display region hidden only by the right position portion 4b, and the region 114c refers to the left position portion 4c. A display area hidden by only.

On the other hand, in the case of fluctuating effects accompanied by small movements, as shown in FIGS. 33-23 (a) and (b), the right symbol 40a, the middle symbol 40b, and the left symbol 40c are regions other than the region 114c. Is displayed in the area 114d.
In other words, when the modeling movable body 4 is operated, the display contents of the right symbol 40a, the middle symbol 40b, and the left symbol 40c are displayed in a small area 114d on the image display unit 114. In the effect example shown in FIGS. 33-23, the right symbol 40a and the left symbol 40c both display “4” and the middle symbol 40b displays a banana image, which is a reach effect.

In the fluctuating effect, effect control that uses two types of motion effects of the modeling movable body 4 can be considered. The case where only the right arm of the specific character extends (see FIG. 33-14) is set as the first position, and the case where the body of the specific character appears and the right arm extends (see FIGS. 33-12 and 33-13) is the second position. For example, the position is lowered to the first position when the SPSP is developed, and is lowered to the second position when the jackpot is confirmed.
In the case of such a production example, various modifications can be further considered. For example, the image display unit 114 at the second position is an image effect using, for example, rainbow colors. It is also conceivable to control the movable accessory 115 so that the time spent at the second position is longer than the time spent at the first position. It is also conceivable that the sound effects are controlled in the same way or different from each other in the case of the first position and in the case of the second position.

  Further, as an example of the arrangement of the decorative symbols in the image display unit 114, a control example that considers the positional relationship between the modeling movable body 4 of the movable accessory 115 and the vehicle-type robot unit 5 (see FIG. 1) described later can be considered. For example, normally, a decorative design is arranged between the modeling movable body 4 and the car-shaped robot unit 5 so as not to cover the modeling movable body 4 and the car-shaped robot unit 5. And at the time of SP reach production, a decoration symbol is displayed small in the middle position of modeling movable body 4 and vehicle type robot part 5, and the decoration symbol is rocked.

In FIG. 33-23 (a), the pedestal image 40d and the digested object 40e are displayed on the image display unit 114. In FIG. 33 (b), both are displayed on the image display unit 114. Not.
In addition, the digest object 40e shown in FIG. 33-23 is different in type from the digest object 40e shown in FIG. 33-22 described above. That is, the digestion object 40e in the case of FIG. 33-22 is indicated by a white circle and is a normal one. On the other hand, the digest object 40e in the case of FIGS. 33 to 23 is indicated by a hatched circle, and is a special thing that suggests that the possibility of a big hit is high by prefetching (preliminary determination).

[Significance about image production of image display unit 114 in cooperation with modeling movable body 4]
Here, when a motion effect is performed by moving the movable body 4, such a motion effect may be performed in front of the image display unit 114. In such a motion effect, the display area of the image display unit 114 is hidden, and the effect of the image effect of the image display unit 114 may be hindered.
Therefore, the following configuration is employed in order to provide a synergistic effect between the motion effect of the movable body 4 and the image effect of the image display unit 114 to increase the degree of completion of the effect.
In other words, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment is a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 100) that performs a predetermined effect, and includes a first moving body (for example, the main body 4a) and a second moving body (for example, for example). A first region (for example, a hidden portion by a movable body (for example, the modeling movable body 4) having the left position portion 4c) and the first moving body (for example, the main body portion 4a) of the movable body (for example, the modeling movable body 4). An image display unit (for example, the image display unit 114) that has an area 114a) and a second region (for example, the region 114c) that is hidden by the second moving body (for example, the left position unit 4c), and displays an image. The image display unit (for example, the image display unit 114) is configured such that the first region (for example, the region 114a) and / or the second region (for example, the region) when the movable body (for example, the modeling movable body 4) operates. 114c) The displayed decorative symbols (for example, the right symbol 40a, the middle symbol 40b, and the left symbol 40c) are displayed on the third region (for example, the region 114c) other than the first region (for example, the region 114a). It is displayed in the area 114d).

Next, the vehicle type robot unit 5 provided in the movable accessory 115 will be described.
<Configuration of the vehicle type robot unit 5 of the movable accessory 115>
FIG. 34-1 is a diagram illustrating a standby state of the moving unit 51 of the vehicle-type robot unit 5.
FIG. 34-2 is a diagram illustrating an appearance state of the moving unit 51 of the vehicle-type robot unit 5.
First, in the pachinko gaming machine 100 according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 34-1, the gaming board 110 has an opening 110H formed at the center. The opening 110H is mainly provided so that the display screen 114S of the image display unit 114 is opposed to the opening 110H.

  In addition, the decorative pattern 30A is displayed on the display screen 114S as the game progresses. The decorative design 30A is displayed using, for example, a plurality of numbers. In particular, in the present embodiment, in the decorative pattern 30A, the modeling movable body 4 and the vehicle-type robot unit 5 constituting the movable accessory 115 are associated with each numeral. For example, the vehicle type robot unit 5 is associated with the numeral “3”. As specific examples of the association, the number “3” is superimposed on the image of the vehicle type robot unit 5, the color scheme of the number “3” is made the same color as the vehicle type robot unit 5, or the number “3” itself is It can be configured by the characteristic shape of the vehicle-type robot unit 5.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 34-1, a hold display icon 30B for performing a hold display effect is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 114S. Here, in the present embodiment, the modeling movable body 4 is positioned on the upper side of the display screen 114S, and the moving unit 51 of the vehicle type robot unit 5 is positioned on the lower side of the display screen 114S. Accordingly, the hold display icon 30B is displayed at the lower end of the display screen 114S at the right end. Further, the change icon 30C that displays the change that changes due to digestion of the reserved ball is displayed at the lower side of the display screen 114S in the center.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the game board 110 is provided with a stage 110S that is disposed above the first start port 121 and drops the game ball toward the first start port 121 after receiving the game ball once. In addition, the game board 110 includes an entry prevention unit 110G that prevents entry of a game ball into an effector such as the image display unit 114 or the movable accessory 115 on the upper side of the stage 110S.

  As shown in FIG. 34-1, the vehicle-type robot unit 5 includes a moving unit 51 and a base member 52 that forms a path along which the moving unit 51 moves. Further, in the present embodiment, the moving unit 51 includes a deforming unit 53 and a decorative unit 54 provided adjacent to the deforming unit 53.

(Overview of moving unit 51)
Then, the moving unit 51 shifts from the “standby state” that is the initial state illustrated in FIG. 34-1 to the “appearance state” that has moved from the standby state and appeared in a conspicuous position as illustrated in FIG. 34-2. On the contrary, an operation of shifting from the appearance state to the standby state is performed.
Specifically, the deforming portion 53 of the moving portion 51 is a standby position (hereinafter referred to as “standby position”) as shown in FIG. 34-1 on the moving path formed by the base member 52. As shown in FIG. 34-2, stop positions are set at the left end and the central portion that is the position of the appearance state (hereinafter referred to as “appearance position”).

  In addition, the decorative portion 54 of the moving portion 51 appears on the left side of the central portion, which is the standby position as shown in FIG. 34-1 and on the moving path formed by the base member 52, as shown in FIG. 34-2. A stop position is set on the right side of the central portion that is the position and on the right end that is also the appearance position. As described above, the decorative portion 54 of the present embodiment is provided with two stop positions in the appearance state. In the following description, regarding the position of the decoration part 54 that has shifted to the appearance state, the right side of the central part where the decoration part 54 is located is referred to as a “first appearance position”, and the right end part where the decoration part 54 is located is “ This is called “second appearance position”.

Further, the deforming unit 53 can take two forms, an “initial form” that is a state before deformation shown in FIG. 34-1 and a “deformation form” that is a state after deformation shown in FIG. 34-2. It is configured. In the present embodiment, the deformable portion 53 has a windshield portion 530 in the initial form, and is in the form of a car that draws a shape when the automobile is viewed from the front side. Furthermore, the deformation | transformation part 53 becomes a form of the robot which draws the shape of a humanoid machine life form in a deformation | transformation form. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 34-2, the moving unit 51 is configured to be movable and deformable as parts that form a robot. A portion 534 and a leg portion 535. The shoulder portion 533 further includes a corner portion 536 that moves forward and backward with respect to the shoulder portion 533.
The face portion 531 has a pair of left and right protrusions 531P on the lower side of the face portion 531 (see FIG. 34-8 described later). Further, the arm portion 534 has a protrusion 534P (see FIG. 34-6 described later). The protrusion 531P and the protrusion 534P will be described in detail later.

  And in this Embodiment, as shown to FIGS. 34-2, the shoulder part 533, the arm part 534, the leg part 535, and the corner | angular part 536 are provided in a left-right pair. The structures of the pair of left and right parts are the same in basic structure, although there are some differences in shape. In the following description, when there is no need to particularly distinguish the structure of each pair of left and right parts, one of the left and right members will be described as a representative, and detailed description of the other member will be omitted. There is.

On the other hand, the decoration part 54 has the decoration board 541 on which the decoration of the character such as a pattern or “GO !!” was given in the present embodiment. And the decoration part 54 isolate | separates with respect to the deformation | transformation part 53 as shown in FIG. It is configured to be able to take two states, “state”.
In the present embodiment, the “integrated state” means a state in which the deformable portion 53 and the decorative portion 54 are joined together so that they are in mechanical contact, or the deformable portion 53 and the decorative portion 54 are in contact with each other. It means a state of gathering to the extent that it appears to be.

(Outline of the base member 52)
As shown in FIG. 34-1, the base member 52 forms a moving path of the arc-shaped moving portion 51 that protrudes downward. In the present embodiment, the moving path of the moving unit 51 is formed along the lower edge of the opening 110H of the game board 110. That is, the moving path of the moving unit 51 is formed along the stage 110S and the entry preventing unit 110G. Further, from another point of view, the moving path of the moving unit 51 is formed along the lower end of the display screen 114S of the image display unit 114 facing the lower edge of the opening 110H.

Here, the moving unit 51 performs an effect control unit based on various commands from the game control unit 200 when a change effect from the start of change to the stop of change of the decorative symbol 30A is performed on the screen display in the image display unit 114. 300 operates under control. In the present embodiment, for example, an effect operation using the moving unit 51 is executed when performing a variable effect when winning a jackpot and when performing a reach effect. And according to the expectation degree of jackpot, the moving part 51 is operated and it shifts to the appearance state. For example, in the case of winning the big hit, the deforming unit 53 of the moving unit 51 is operated to move to the appearance position, and the mode is changed to the deformed form. Moreover, when performing reach production, the deformation | transformation part 53 is changed to an appearance state with a predetermined probability, and is changed to a deformation | transformation form.
By setting as described above, it is a common recognition for the players that when the deforming unit 53 of the moving unit 51 operates, the player wins a jackpot with a certain probability. For this reason, the player not only moves the deformed portion 53 of the moving portion 51 to the appearance position and shifts to the deformed form, but also relatively moves such as vibration and swinging of the deformable portion 53 of the moving portion 51 and the decorative portion 54. Even if it is a small movement, you can enjoy the game with a big hit expectation while paying attention to its behavior.

  Further, regarding the timing for actually operating the moving unit 51, for example, when the effect button 161 is pressed by the player during a predetermined time period such as between the start of change of the decorative symbol 30A and the stop of change, the movement is performed. Settings such as operating the unit 51 are made. As described above, in the present embodiment, the operation timing of the moving unit 51 is executed based on the player's operation, thereby further encouraging the player to participate in the game.

<Basic rendering operation of the moving unit 51>
FIG. 34-3 is a diagram for describing a series of movements of the moving unit 51 of the present embodiment.
A basic effect operation of the moving unit 51 of the present embodiment will be described. For example, in the case of winning a big hit, the basic performance operation is an operation that is performed at once from the standby state to the movement to the final appearance position and the transition to the final state (deformation form, separation state). It is. Further, in the present embodiment, the deforming portion 53 of the moving portion 51 moves from the standby position to the appearance position and shifts to the deformation mode, and the decoration portion 54 moves from the standby position to the appearance position (second appearance position). The time required to do this is set to a few seconds. As described above, the moving unit 51 that performs the basic performance operation realizes a performance with a sense of speed by moving in a blink of an eye and deforming in a blink of an eye.
In addition to the basic operation, the moving unit 51 performs an operation to stop moving or vibrate in the middle of the state from the standby state to the final appearance state. This will be described in detail later.

  First, as shown in FIG. 34-3 (a), in the standby state, the deformable portion 53 of the moving portion 51 is located at the left end portion, and the decorative portion 54 is located on the left side of the central portion. At this time, the deformable portion 53 is in the initial form, and the decorative portion 54 forms an integrated state.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 34-3 (b), when the moving unit 51 starts to move, the deforming unit 53 and the decorative unit 54 move in the right direction while maintaining the integrated state. In the present embodiment, the movement path formed by the base member 52 is formed in an arc shape that is a curve. Therefore, when moving, the deformable portion 53 and the decorative portion 54 move from the left end portion toward the central portion in the left-right direction and downward in the up-down direction. That is, the deforming part 53 and the decoration part 54 move from diagonally upper left to diagonally lower right.

Here, in the deformed portion 53 of the initial form, the windshield portion 530 protrudes upward from the lower edge (the upper side of the entry preventing portion 110G) of the opening 110H of the game board 110. Here, in this embodiment, it is configured such that the display screen 114S (see FIG. 34-1) of the image display unit 114 is viewed from the player through the opening 110H. In the present embodiment, in the deformable portion 53 in the initial form, the windshield portion 530 overlaps the display screen 114S of the image display portion 114.
Here, the windshield part 530 is comprised with the transparent member. Therefore, the player can see the rear display screen 114 </ b> S through the windshield portion 530. Thus, in this Embodiment, until the deformation | transformation part 53 transfers to a deformation | transformation form, the front glass part 530 which is a part which overlaps with the display screen 114S is comprised by a transparent member, and the windshield part 530 is comprised. The display screen 114S can be viewed by the player.

  And as shown to FIG. 34-3 (c), the moving part 51 transfers to an appearance state. In the appearance state, the deforming portion 53 stops at the central portion that is the appearance position. Moreover, the decoration part 54 is located in the center part right side which is a 1st appearance position. That is, until this timing, the decorative portion 54 maintains an integrated state and is integrated with the deformable portion 53.

However, as illustrated in FIG. 34-3 (d), the decoration unit 54 continues to move and further moves toward the second appearance position. That is, in the case of a basic operation, the decorative portion 54 moves while maintaining an integral state that is integral with the deformable portion 53, and continues to move even after the deformation portion 53 stops moving. A separation state is formed.
In the present embodiment, the moving speed of the deformable portion 53 and the decorative portion 54 in the integrated state and the moving speed of the decorative portion 54 in the separated state are set substantially equal. Therefore, as the movement of the moving part 51, the deforming part 53 and the decorative part 54 appear from the standby position vigorously, the deforming part 53 stops at the appearance position, and the decorative part 54 moves further to slide. Looks like going.
In this way, the decorative portion 54 moves together with the deformable portion 53 in an integrated state, and forms a separated state with respect to the deformable portion 53 during the movement, for example, compared with a case where only one member moves. Thus, it is possible to show the player a complicated action with a sense of speed, and to entertain the player.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 34-3 (e), the deforming portion 53 located at the appearance position starts deformation from the initial form toward the deformed form. In this state, the decoration part 54 is stopped at the final second appearance position.

  And as shown to FIG. 34-3 (f), the deformation | transformation part 53 transfers to a final deformation | transformation form from an initial form. In the present embodiment, the deforming unit 53 is deformed so as to expand in the vertical direction and the left-right direction from the state of drawing the shape of the car in the initial form, and shifts to the form of the robot that becomes the deformed form. In particular, the deformed deformable portion 53 rises from the lower edge of the opening 110H of the game board 110, the face portion 531 is located at the center of the display screen 114S of the image display portion 114, and the display screen 114S. (See FIG. 34-2) It is positioned so as to overlap a part of the lower half.

  As described above, the deforming unit 53 and the decorative unit 54 perform the above-described basic performance operation and shift from the standby state to the appearance state, so that the player can show an impactful movement. it can.

In particular, the deforming unit 53 shifts from the initial form to the deformed form after moving from the standby position to the appearance position. Therefore, for example, compared with a case where a member whose position is fixed in advance in the central portion is deformed in the central portion, the impact felt by the player is increased. In this embodiment, while moving from the standby position (first position) to the appearance position (second position) while maintaining the initial form, which is a relatively small form, the form is relatively large at the appearance position. It moves to the deformation | transformation form which is. Accordingly, when the deforming portion 53 that has moved from the end portion is located at the center portion, the player can be further surprised by the operation of greatly deforming.
Moreover, since the deformation | transformation part 53 moves along the lower edge of the opening part 110H used as the lower end part of the display screen 114S, it is comparatively inconspicuous from a stand-by position to an appearance position. On the other hand, the deforming portion 53 is greatly deformed at the central portion in the left-right direction of the display screen 114S when it is deformed. Therefore, the deformation part 53 can give a very big impact to the player.

  In the above-described example, the deforming unit 53 is deformed from the initial form to the deformed form while being located at the appearance position. For example, the deforming unit 53 operates to be deformed to the deformed form while being located at the standby position. It doesn't matter. Furthermore, you may make it transfer to a deformation | transformation form from an initial form, while moving from a stand-by position to an appearance position.

Subsequently, the transition from the appearance state of the moving unit 51 to the standby state will be described.
The transition from the appearance state of the moving unit 51 to the standby state is basically the reverse operation in the transition from the appearance state described above with reference to FIG. 34-3 (a) to FIG. 34-3 (f). I do. This will be specifically described below.

  First, the deformable portion 53 of the modified form shown in FIG. 34-3 (f) is deformed so as to contract in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction as shown in FIG. 34-3 (e). Specifically, various members are folded so as to shrink from the outside to the inside while moving downward. At this time, the decoration part 54 is in a state of being located at the second appearance position.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 34-3 (d), the deforming portion 53 is deformed into the original initial form at the appearance position. Moreover, the decoration part 54 moves to the left side from the right end part toward the center part along the arcuate path at the timing when the deforming part 53 shifts to the initial form.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 34C, the decorative portion 54 shifts to an integrated state that is integrated with the deformable portion 53.

  Furthermore, as illustrated in FIG. 34-3 (b), the deformable portion 53 moves together with the decorative portion 54 along an arcuate path at a timing when it is integrated with the decorative portion 54. In the present embodiment, the deformable portion 53 and the decorative portion 54 move from the central portion toward the upper left.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 34-3 (a), the deforming portion 53 stops at the left end portion that is the standby position, and the decoration portion 54 stops at the left side of the central portion that is the standby position.

  By the way, apart from the basic performance operation described above, for example, the deformable portion 53 does not shift to the deformed form at the appearance position, or the decorative portion 54 does not shift to the separated state and is not positioned at the second appearance position. There is a case where a predetermined operation is performed at a stage before the deformable portion 53 and the decorative portion 54 shift to the final appearance state. And the expectation effect that the deformation | transformation part 53 rock | fluctuates as if it transfers to a deformation | transformation form, or the decoration part 54 swings as if it transfers to a isolation | separation state is performed. In the present embodiment, as described above, the degree of expectation for winning the jackpot is set so that the deformation unit 53 shifts to the deformation mode. Therefore, for the player, the behavior as if the deforming portion 53 shifts to the deformed form is an effect that makes the player expect a big hit. Hereinafter, the first expected effect and the second expected effect will be described as specific examples of the expected effect.

<First expected production>
FIG. 34-4 is a diagram for explaining the first expected effect.

The first expected effect is an effect that is performed when the deforming part 53 and the decoration part 54 are located at each appearance position.
In the first expected effect, as described with reference to FIGS. 34-3 (a) to 34-3 (c), first, the moving unit 51 is moved from the standby position to the appearance position. Specifically, the deforming portion 53 is stopped at the appearance position, and the decoration portion 54 is stopped at the first appearance position.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 34-4 (a), the deformable portion 53 is swung so as to reciprocate at predetermined distance intervals in the vertical direction around a predetermined location. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 34-4 (a), the decorative portion 54 is swung so as to reciprocate at a predetermined distance interval in the left-right direction around a predetermined location. Further, in the first expected performance, by swinging the decorative portion 54 while swinging the deformable portion 53, the swing of the deformable portion 53 in the vertical direction and the swing of the decorative portion 54 in the horizontal direction are suppressed. Run at the same time. At this time, the deforming portion 53 swings in the vertical direction while maintaining the initial form which is the form before the deformation.

As described above, in this embodiment, before the deformable portion 53 shifts to the deformed form, the deformable portion 53 swings in a predetermined direction (for example, the vertical direction), and the decoration portion 54 is different from the predetermined direction. It swings in (for example, the left-right direction). In this way, a pair of the deformable portion 53 and the decorative portion 54 as the moving portion 51 swings in different directions, thereby attracting the player's eyes, and the moving portion 51 realizes an impactful movement. doing.
In the above example, it has been described that the swing of the deformable portion 53 and the swing of the decorative portion 54 are performed simultaneously, but they may be performed at different timings.

Also, in the first expected effect shown in FIG. 34-4 (a), for example, the deforming portion 53 is in the vertical direction (see FIG. 34-4 (b)), which is the direction when the deforming portion 53 shifts to the deformed form. Swing. That is, the moving direction when the deforming part 53 shifts to the deformed form coincides with the direction in which the deforming part 53 swings in the first expected effect. In the first expected effect shown in FIG. 34-4 (a), for example, the decorative portion 54 is in the left-right direction (see FIG. 34-4 (b)), which is the direction when the decorative portion 54 shifts to the separated state. Swing. That is, the moving direction when the decorative portion 54 shifts to the deformed form matches the direction in which the decorative portion 54 swings in the first expected effect.
Therefore, at the time of the first expected performance, the player sees these behaviors while being excited with the expectation that the deformable portion 53 will shift to the deformed form and the decorative portion 54 will shift to the separated state. Become. As a result, the player can play a game while enjoying the movement of the moving unit 51.

  In addition, as an operation | movement after rocking | fluctuation in the different direction of said moving part 51, the some pattern from which the expectation degree of jackpot winning is different can be prepared, for example. For example, as an effect with high expectation of winning a big hit, as shown in FIG. 34-4 (b), the deforming portion 53 is deformed into a deformed form, and the decoration portion 54 is moved to the second appearance position and separated. The state can be changed. On the other hand, for example, as an effect with a low expectation of winning a big hit, an operation of returning the moving unit 51 from the state shown in FIG. 34-4 (a) to the standby state shown in FIG. 34-1 can be performed.

Moreover, before the deformation | transformation part 53 transfers to a deformation | transformation form, the deformation | transformation part 53 rock | fluctuates in an up-down direction in the state which maintained the initial form. As described above, the deforming portion 53 shifts to the deformed form while moving upward. Therefore, when the deforming portion 53 maintains the initial form and moves in the vertical direction, the player's expectation for the transition to the deformed form of the deforming portion 53 increases.
For example, in the case of performing an effect that makes the deformation unit 53 operate to be considered to be a transition to the deformation mode, for example, an effect of the operation of repeating the state in which the deformation unit 53 is deformed to about half and the initial mode is also possible . On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the deformable portion 53 is swung in the vertical direction in a state where the initial form before shifting to the deformed form is intentionally maintained. This increases the player's attention as to whether or not the swinging deformable portion 53 is greatly deformed thereafter. Therefore, the expectation of the player who desires the deforming portion 53 to shift to the deformed form can be further increased.

In the first expected effect, the deforming unit 53 can be operated as follows in conjunction with the display of the decorative symbol 30A displayed on the display screen 114S.
As shown in FIG. 34-4 (a), in the changing effect, for example, the changing decorative symbol 30A is displayed on the display screen 114S. In the example of FIG. 34-4 (a), the left decorative symbol 30A and the right decorative symbol 30A are in a stopped state, and the remaining central decorative symbol 30A is changing (so-called reach). State). In this state, the deforming unit 53 appears at the standby position while maintaining the initial form. At this time, the deformable portion 53 is in a state where it does not overlap with the decorative design 30A at all or only a part of it overlaps with the decorative design 30A. That is, in a state in which the decorative symbol 30A is variably displayed, the deforming unit 53 does not hide all of the decorative symbol 30A or most of the decorative symbol 30A.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 34-4 (b), for example, immediately before the variation of the decorative symbol 30A displayed on the display screen 114S in the variation effect stops, the deformation unit 53 shifts to the deformation mode. And after the deformation | transformation part 53 transfers to a deformation | transformation form, the decoration symbol 30A stops a fluctuation | variation. At this time, the deformable portion 53 is in a state of being overlaid on most of the decorative symbol 30A. Thereafter, when the deforming portion 53 returns to the initial form, the player can confirm the entire appearance of the three decorative symbols 30A. That is, when the deformed portion 53 is retracted, the aligned decorative pattern 30A appears in the back, so that compared to the case where the decorative pattern 30A is aligned in a state where all of the central decorative pattern 30A is visible from the beginning, the player's Exciting feeling can be enhanced.

  In the example of FIG. 34-4 (b), the deformed deforming portion 53 is positioned so as to overlap with the decorative symbol 30A so that a part of the decorative symbol 30A can be seen. However, for example, the deformed deformable portion 53 may hide all of the decorative symbols 30A. For example, when the left and right decorative symbols 30A are already stopped, only the remaining central decorative symbol 30A is hidden. Alternatively, it may be positioned so as to hide most of the remaining central decorative pattern 30A.

<Second expected production>
FIG. 34-5 is a diagram for explaining the second expected effect.
The second expected effect is an effect that is performed when the moving unit 51 is located at the standby position.
The moving unit 51 swings in a reciprocating manner at a predetermined distance interval around a predetermined location in a direction of moving toward the appearance position at the standby position and a direction of returning to the standby position. In the present embodiment, since the movement path of the moving part 51 formed by the base member 52 is formed so as to protrude downward, the swing at the standby position is from the diagonally upper left to the diagonally lower right. . That is, the deforming part 53 and the decoration part 54 constituting the moving part 51 swing in an oblique direction at the standby position.

Then, when the moving unit 51 swings at the standby position, the player expects to start a basic effect operation using the moving unit 51. That is, in the effect using the moving unit 51, the player can swing at the standby position which is the earliest stage, as described with reference to FIG. I feel that the operation starts.
As a result, the player's attention to the moving unit 51 increases, and it is possible to increase the expectation of the player who wishes to shift to the deformed form.

  In particular, in the second expected performance, as shown in FIG. 34-5 (a), the deforming portion 53 swings in an oblique direction at the standby position (first position). On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 34-5 (b), the deformable portion 53 swings in the vertical direction at the appearance position (second position). As described above, in the present embodiment, the deforming portion 53 that is the same effect body swings in an oblique direction that is a predetermined direction at the standby position, and the vertical direction that is different from the predetermined direction at the appearance position. Oscillates. That is, the deforming portion 53 that is the same effect body swings in different directions at different positions. Therefore, since the player can show various movements in the direction in which the deformable portion 53 swings, for example, it is possible to show the player an impacting performance operation.

Also, as shown in FIG. 34-5 (a), the deformable portion 53 is swung in the direction toward the appearance position (second position) at the standby position (first position), and thereafter, as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 5B, a two-stage effect operation may be performed in which the deforming portion 53 is swung in the direction of deformation to the deformed form (second form) at the appearance position (second position).
In the present embodiment, for example, when winning a jackpot, the deforming unit 53 is finally located at the appearance position and shifts to the deformed form. Therefore, the player first expects that the deforming portion 53 is located at the appearance position. Therefore, the player's sense of expectation can be enhanced by swinging the deformable portion 53 in the direction toward the appearance position at the standby position. Further, in the present embodiment, the player's expectation is further enhanced by swinging the deforming portion 53 in the direction of movement when the deforming portion 53 is deformed at the appearance position. As described above, by performing a two-stage effect operation by swinging the deforming portion 53 as an effect to expect a big hit, it is possible to greatly increase the player's sense of expectation.

  In the present embodiment, the deformable portion 53 in the state of being in the standby position has a car shape. On the other hand, the deforming portion 53 that has shifted to the deformed form at the appearance position has a robot shape. For this reason, when the deforming portion 53 is swung at the standby position, a sound that blows the engine of the car is emitted from the speaker 156. On the other hand, when the deformable portion 53 is swung at the appearance position, a sound that causes the robot to operate may be played from the speaker 156. In other words, the deforming unit 53 that is the same effect body may swing in different directions at different positions and emit different sounds.

  In the second expected effect, the deforming unit 53 can be operated as follows in conjunction with the display of the decorative symbol 30A displayed on the display screen 114S.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 34-5 (a), the changing decorative pattern 30A, for example, is displayed on the display screen 114S in the changing effect. In the example of FIG. 34-5 (a), it is a state of whether or not the left decorative symbol 30A and the right decorative symbol 30A are aligned and stopped (so-called reach or not). In this state, the deformable portion 53 swings in the standby position in the direction of movement toward the appearance position, thereby increasing the player's expectation of jackpot.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 34-5 (b), the left central decorative symbol 30A and the right decorative symbol 30A are in a stopped state, and the remaining central decorative symbol 30A is changing. (So-called reach state). In this state, the deforming portion 53 can further expand the player's expectation for winning the jackpot by swinging in the moving direction when the deforming portion 53 transitions to the deformed form at the appearance position.

  In the second expected effect, for example, referring to FIG. 34-5 (b), the example in which the deformable portion 53 is swung in the vertical direction is used as the swing at the appearance position. It is not a thing. For example, it can be suggested that even when the decorative portion 54 shifts to the separated state, the deformable portion 53 shifts to a final form such as a shift to a deformed form thereafter. Therefore, the big hit may be expected by swinging the decorative portion 54 in the left-right direction at the first appearance position.

  Further, the first expected effect and the second expected effect may be appropriately combined. That is, regarding the combination of the operation of the moving unit 51 and the operation of the fluctuating effect displayed on the display screen 114S, for example, FIG. 34-5 (a), FIG. 34-5 (b) (FIG. 34-4 (a)), FIG. You may carry out in steps in order of 34-4 (b).

Furthermore, when performing a change effect, for example, a pseudo continuous notice (pseudo train) may be advanced with the operation of the moving unit 51 as an opportunity. In the present embodiment, when the pseudo-continuous effect is executed, for example, the probability of winning a jackpot can be set to be high.
In the present embodiment, when the pseudo-continuous presentation is started or when the player feels that the pseudo-continuous presentation is started, the deforming unit 53 is moved to the appearance position, and FIG. 34-4 (a). As described with reference to FIG. 5, the deformable portion 53 is swung in the vertical direction. Further, after that, as described with reference to FIG. 34-4 (b), a pseudo-continuous effect is performed after the deformable portion 53 has shifted to the deformed form, or the deformable portion 53 is in the initial form. It is set so that the pseudo-continuous production is performed without shifting to the modified form.
As a result, the player can first expect that the pseudo-continuous production is started by the deformation unit 53 moving to the appearance position. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the deforming portion 53 shifts to the deformed form, the pseudo continuous effect is surely executed. Therefore, the player can play the game while expecting the player as to whether or not the deforming portion 53 shifts to the deformed form.

In the present embodiment, the numeral “3” constituting the decorative symbol 30 </ b> A is associated with the vehicle-type robot unit 5. Therefore, for example, the moving unit 51 (deformation unit 53, decoration unit 54) may be operated in correspondence with the variation state of the numeral “3” of the decoration symbol 30A. Specifically, when the change of the numeral “3” of the decorative design 30A is stopped or the change is temporarily stopped, the deformable portion 53 is moved to the appearance position, and FIG. 34-5 (b) is referred to. However, as described above, the deformable portion 53 may be swung in the vertical direction. In this case, for example, the moving unit 51 may be operated according to the state of one number “3” among the three decorative symbols 30A arranged in the left, center, and right, or a plurality of numbers “3” may be displayed. The moving unit 51 may be operated according to the state of being aligned. In addition, as the operation of the moving unit 51 at this time, the operation of the moving unit 51 described in the present embodiment, such as movement or deformation of the deformation unit 53 or movement of the decoration unit 54, can be appropriately executed.
This also applies to the number “7” of the modeling movable body 4 and the decorative design 30A. That is, the modeling movable body 4 may be operated corresponding to the variation state of the numeral “7” of the decorative pattern 30A. Furthermore, the title logo portion 7 and the numbers of the decorative design 30A may be combined and operated in the same manner.

  Furthermore, as described above, the deformable portion 53 includes the windshield portion 530 that allows the player to see the display screen 114S through the screen. Therefore, predetermined information may be displayed at a position corresponding to the windshield 530 on the display screen 114S. That is, the predetermined information is reflected in the back of the windshield 530 as viewed from the player. As the predetermined information, for example, information that suggests the current gaming state, information related to a variation effect, explanation information about a specific effect, privilege information that is useful to the player, and the like can be used.

  In the present embodiment, when the deformable portion 53 moves to the central portion, the windshield portion 530 is located on the lower side of the display screen 114S and in the central portion (see, for example, FIG. 34-4). At this time, as described above, the variation icon 30C is displayed in the lower part of the display screen 114S and in the center (see, for example, 34-1). However, in the present embodiment, the windshield unit 530 can transmit the display screen 114S and show it to the player. Therefore, the player can check the variation icon 30C through the windshield unit 530.

On the other hand, when the deforming part 53 shifts to the deformed form, as shown in FIG. However, in the present embodiment, an effect related to the prior determination using the variation icon 30 </ b> C can be performed during the variation by a movement of showing or hiding the variation icon 30 </ b> C by the deforming unit 53.
Specifically, based on the result of the prior determination, for example, the display mode of the variation icon 30C can be changed during the variation. Therefore, first, the deformed portion 53 of the initial form is positioned at the appearance position. The variation icon 30 </ b> C can be confirmed through the windshield unit 530. Thereafter, the deformable portion 53 is shifted to a deformed form. At this time, the display mode of the variation icon 30C is changed by changing the color or pattern of the variation icon 30C. Further, thereafter, the deformable portion 53 is returned to the initial form again. Then, the player will notice the change of the variation icon 30C before and after the operation of the deforming unit 53. In the present embodiment, the display mode of the variation icon 30C is not simply changed, but the display mode is changed in accordance with the operation of hiding the display screen 114S by the deformation unit 53, so that the player can play more games. Can be entertained.

Next, the mechanism of the vehicle type robot unit 5 that performs the rendering operation as described above will be described in detail.
FIG. 34-6 is a diagram illustrating an overall configuration of the vehicle-type robot unit 5.
FIG. 34-7 is a diagram illustrating the deformable portion base 61 and the left-right direction moving portion 64 of the present embodiment.
34-6 and 34-7 are views of the vehicle-type robot unit 5 as seen from the rear side.

  As shown in FIG. 34-6, the deforming portion 53 is a deforming portion as a mechanism for realizing the deforming operation and moving operation of the face portion 531, the chest portion 532, the shoulder portion 533, the arm portion 534, the leg portion 535, and the corner portion 536. 53, a deforming portion base 61 that is a base for mounting each component constituting the component 53, a vertical moving portion 62 that mainly constitutes a moving mechanism in the vertical direction of the deforming portion 53, and a deformation mechanism in the vertical and horizontal directions of the deforming portion 53 It has a deformation mechanism portion 63 that constitutes, and a left-right direction movement portion 64 that mainly constitutes a movement mechanism in the left-right direction (arc direction) of the deformation portion 53 and the decoration portion 54.

First, the deformation part base 61, the vertical movement part 62, and the deformation mechanism part 63 will be described.
(Configuration of the deformable portion base 61)
The deformable portion base 61 includes a base body portion 611, a first gear train 612, and a drive motor 613.
The base main body 611 is a plate-like member and serves as a basis for movement of the position of the entire deformation portion 53 in the left-right direction and movement for deformation in the up-down direction. And the base main-body part 611 supports the 1st moving member 621 mentioned later of the up-down direction moving part 62 so that a movement in an up-down direction is possible. The base body 611 has a first fixed rack 611R. The first fixed rack 611R is formed by extending a vertical direction in which a rack gear is formed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 34-7, the base main body 611 has a guided projection 611P, a first guide groove 611G1, and a second guide groove 611G2.
The guided projection 611P is fitted in a vertical groove 522T of the base member 52 described later so as to be movable in the vertical direction.

  The first guide groove 611G1 is a groove formed to extend in the vertical direction. In the present embodiment, the first guide groove 611G1 is provided as a pair on the right side and the left side of the base body 611. In addition, a convex portion 641P provided in a first guided portion 641 described later is fitted into the first guide groove 611G1. The first guide groove 611G1 relatively moves the first guided portion 641 and the base main body portion 611 in the vertical direction while guiding the movement of the convex portion 641P.

  The second guide groove 611G2 is a groove formed mainly extending in a substantially oblique direction. In the present embodiment, the second guide groove 611G2 and the base main body 611 are provided as a pair on the right side and the left side. Further, a convex portion 642P provided in a second guided portion 642, which will be described later, is fitted into the second guide groove 611G2. The second guide groove 611G2 relatively allows the second guided portion 642 and the base main body portion 611 to move when the second guided portion 642 moves along the arcuate path.

As shown in FIG. 34-6, the first gear train 612 is connected to a rack gear portion 6211, which will be described later, of the first moving member 621. Further, the first gear train 612 is driven by the drive motor 613 to rotate.
The drive motor 613 is connected to the first gear train 612 and drives the first gear train 612. The drive motor 613 is controlled by the lamp control unit 320 and operates the first gear train 612 by rotation in a predetermined timing and a predetermined direction.

(Configuration of the vertical movement unit 62)
As shown in FIG. 34-6, the vertical direction moving unit 62 includes a first moving member 621, a second gear train 622, a second moving member 623, a third gear train 624, and a third moving member 625. have.
The first moving member 621 is a plate-like member and is supported by the base body 611 so as to be movable in the vertical direction. Further, the first moving member 621 is formed with a rack gear portion 6211. The rack gear portion 6211 is connected to the first gear train 612.
Further, the first moving member 621 supports the second moving member 623 so as to be movable in the vertical direction. The first moving member 621 holds the gears of the second gear train 622 in a rotatable manner.
Further, the first moving member 621 has a second rack gear portion 6212. The second rack gear portion 6212 is formed by forming a rack gear and extending in the vertical direction. Further, the second rack gear portion 6212 is supported by the first moving member 621 so as to be movable by a predetermined distance with respect to the first moving member 621 in the vertical direction.

  The first moving member 621 supports the leg portion 535 on the front side. Note that the upper end portion of the leg portion 535 is rotatably attached to the first moving member 621, and the lower end portion is movably connected to the base main body portion 611.

  The second gear train 622 is connected to the first fixed rack 611R on the lower side and is connected to a third rack gear portion 623R (described later) of the second moving member 623 on the upper side.

  The second moving member 623 supports the third moving member 625 so as to be movable in the vertical direction. Further, the second moving member 623 rotatably holds each gear of the third gear train 624. Further, the second moving member 623 has a third rack gear portion 623R. The third rack gear portion 623R is formed by extending a vertical direction in which a rack gear is formed. In the present embodiment, a chest 532, a shoulder 533, and an arm 534 are attached to the front side of the second moving member 623.

  The third gear train 624 is connected to the second rack gear portion 6212 of the first moving member 621 on the lower side, and connected to a later-described fourth rack gear portion 625R of the third moving member 625 on the upper side.

  The third moving member 625 has a fourth rack gear portion 625R. The fourth rack gear portion 625R extends in the vertical direction and forms a rack gear. The fourth rack gear portion 625R is connected to the third gear train 624. In the present embodiment, a face portion 531 is attached to the front side of the third moving member 625.

  Further, the front-rear relationship of the main members of the deformable portion base 61 and the up-down direction moving portion 62 configured as described above will be described. In the present embodiment, the base main body 611, the first moving member 621, the second moving member 623, and the third moving member 625 are arranged in order from the rear side to the front side. Then, these plate-like members are relatively slid in a state where the surfaces are kept substantially parallel to each other, whereby the deformable portion 53 is expanded and contracted in the vertical direction. A specific operation will be described below.

(Operation of the vertical movement unit 62)
The deforming unit 53 configured as described above moves the positions of the face 531, the chest 532, the shoulder 533, the arm 534, and the leg 535 in the vertical direction by the vertical moving unit 62. This will be specifically described below.

  First, the first gear train 612 is driven by the drive motor 613. The first gear train 612 moves the first moving member 621 in the vertical direction via the rack gear portion 6211. Here, the leg portion 535 is connected to the first moving member 621. Accordingly, when the first moving member 621 moves in the vertical direction, the leg portion 535 moves in the vertical direction together with the first moving member 621.

In addition, since the second gear train 622 is rotatably held by the first moving member 621, the second gear train 622 also moves as the first moving member 621 moves. At this time, the first fixed rack 611R connected to the second gear train 622 does not move together with the first moving member 621. Therefore, the second gear train 622 is caught by the first fixed rack 611R and rotated. When the second gear train 622 rotates, the second moving member 623 moves through the third rack gear portion 623R connected to the second gear train 622.
A chest 532, a shoulder 533, and an arm 534 are attached to the second moving member 623. Therefore, when the second moving member 623 moves in the vertical direction, the chest part 532, the shoulder part 533, and the arm part 534 move in the vertical direction together with the second moving member 623.

  Thereafter, as the second moving member 623 moves, the third gear train 624 held by the second moving member 623 moves together with the second moving member 623. At this time, the second rack gear portion 6212 connected to the third gear train 624 moves together with the third gear train 624 upward by a predetermined distance. When the second rack gear portion 6212 moves by a predetermined distance, the second rack gear portion 6212 does not move relative to the first moving member 621. Then, the third gear train 624 that moves relative to the first moving member 621 is caught by the second rack gear portion 6212 that has stopped moving relative to the first moving member 621 and rotates.

  The rotating third gear train 624 moves the third moving member 625 in the vertical direction via the fourth rack gear portion 625R. A face portion 531 is attached to the third moving member 625. Therefore, when the third moving member 625 moves in the vertical direction, the face portion 531 moves in the vertical direction together with the third moving member 625. In this way, the face portion 531 protrudes upward.

(Configuration of Deformation Mechanism 63)
FIG. 34-8 is a diagram illustrating the deformation mechanism unit 63 of the present embodiment. FIG. 34-8 is a view of the deformable portion 53 as seen from the rear side.
As shown in FIG. 34-8 (a), the deformation mechanism unit 63 includes a support 631, a contact moving unit 632 disposed on the rear side of the support 631, and a rear side of the contact moving unit 632. And a link portion 633 disposed on the front side of the arm portion 534. Furthermore, as illustrated in FIG. 34-6, the deformation mechanism portion 63 includes a second link portion 634.

  Note that in this embodiment, the shoulder portion 533, the arm portion 534, the leg portion 535, and the corner portion 536 are provided in a pair of left and right. Therefore, a contact moving part 632, a link part 633, and a second link part 634 are also provided in a pair of left and right as a mechanism for deforming and moving these pair of parts. However, the structure of the pair of left and right parts is the same in basic configuration, although there is a slight difference in shape. Therefore, in the following description, when there is no need to particularly distinguish the structures of the pair of left and right parts, one of the left and right members will be described as a representative, and a detailed description of the other member will be omitted.

A second moving member 623 (see FIG. 34-6) is attached to the support 631 from the rear side. In addition, a chest 532 (see FIG. 34-6) is attached to the support 631 from the front side. The support 631 has an arm rotation shaft 631S and a guide groove 631G.
The arm rotation shaft 631 </ b> S forms an axis of rotation of the arm portion 534 and supports the arm portion 534. Accordingly, the arm rotation shaft 631 </ b> S serves as the rotation center of the arm portion 534.
The guide groove 631G is a groove formed substantially along the vertical direction. The guide groove 631G guides the movement of the contact moving unit 632 in the vertical direction. In the present embodiment, as will be described later, a shoulder portion 533 is attached to the contact moving portion 632. Therefore, the guide groove 631G guides the movement of the shoulder portion 533.

The contact moving part 632 has a Y-shaped outline. The contact moving portion 632 is different from the link rotation shaft 632S, the shoulder holding portion 632H, the first arm portion 6321 extending from the link rotation shaft 632S in one direction, and the link rotation shaft 632S to the first arm portion 6321. And a second arm portion 6322 extending in the direction.
The link rotation shaft 632S forms an axis for the link portion 633 to rotate.
The shoulder holding portion 632H supports the shoulder portion 533, and the movement is guided by the guide groove 631G.
The first arm 6321 has a first protrusion 6321P that protrudes toward the rear side at the end. The second arm portion 6322 has a second protrusion 6322P that protrudes toward the rear side at the end. The first protrusion 6321P and the second protrusion 6322P are configured to come into contact with the protrusion 531P formed on the face 531 according to the position of the face 531.

  One end side of the link portion 633 is rotatably held by the link rotation shaft 632S, and the other end side is rotatably connected to the arm portion 534. Accordingly, the link portion 633 moves together with the contact moving portion 632 and rotates around the link rotation shaft 632S as the rotation shaft. And the link part 633 moves the arm part 534 to an up-down direction.

  As shown in FIG. 34-6, the second link portion 634 is configured to be able to contact a protrusion 534P formed on the arm portion 534. Then, the second link portion 634 contacts the protrusion 534 </ b> P according to the operation of the arm portion 534, and advances and retracts the corner portion 536 with respect to the shoulder portion 533.

(Operation of the deformation mechanism 63)
The deformation mechanism portion 63 configured as described above acts so that the shoulder portion 533, the arm portion 534, and the corner portion 536 are deformed by moving the face portion 531 up and down by the above-described vertical movement portion 62.
First, an operation when the deforming unit 53 is deformed from the initial form to the deformed form will be described.
When the face portion 531 moves upward from the state shown in FIG. 34-8 (a), the protrusion 531P of the face portion 531 becomes the first protrusion portion of the contact moving portion 632 as shown in FIG. 34-8 (b). 6321P is contacted. Accordingly, the contact moving part 632 moves upward while being guided by the guide groove 631G of the support 631. Then, the shoulder 533 attached to the contact moving unit 632 moves so as to be lifted upward. Further, when the link portion 633 connected to the contact moving portion 632 moves, the arm portion 534 moves so as to be lifted upward with the arm rotation shaft 631S as a fulcrum.
Further, as shown in FIG. 34-6, the protrusion 534P pushes up the second link part 634 by moving the arm part 534 upward. As a result, the corner portion 536 that contacts the second link portion 634 moves upward.

Further, when the face portion 531 is further moved upward, as shown in FIG. 34-8 (c), the contact moving portion 632 is caught at the upper end portion of the guide groove 631G, and the contact moving portion 632 is moved. No more moving. At this time, the shoulder portion 533 is located in the uppermost direction, the arm portion 534 is located in the uppermost direction, and the corner portion 536 is also moved in the uppermost direction.
As described above, in the present embodiment, the shoulder portion 533, the arm portion 534, and the corner portion 536 are moved upward by moving the face portion 531 upward. That is, the other shoulders 533, arms 534, and corners 536 can be moved upward simply by moving the face 531 upward.

  In the present embodiment, since the second rack gear portion 6212 is movable by a certain distance with respect to the first moving member 621, the upward movement timing of the face portion 531 is set, for example, on the chest portion 532 or the like. The movement is delayed with respect to the direction of movement. As a result, the third moving member 625 moves upward from a state where the second moving member 623 is raised upward to some extent. Then, by the movement of the third moving member 625, as described above, the shoulder portion 533, the arm portion 534, and the corner portion 536 move upward. Therefore, it is possible to show a movement in which the shoulder portion 533, the arm portion 534, and the corner portion 536 are deformed after moving upward as a whole.

Next, an operation when the deforming unit 53 is deformed from the deformed form to the initial form will be described.
From the state shown in FIG. 34-8 (c), the face 531 is moved downward. The protrusion 531P of the face portion 531 moves downward. Then, the shoulder portion 533 and the arm portion 534 are not supported by the contact moving portion 632 in the upward direction, and move downward with their own weight. And the shoulder part 533 attached to the contact moving part 632 moves so that it may fall below. Further, when the link portion 633 connected to the contact moving portion 632 moves downward, the arm portion 534 also moves downward with the arm rotation shaft 631S as a fulcrum.
As shown in FIG. 34-6, in the present embodiment, when the arm portion 534 moves downward, the protrusion 534P moves downward, and the second link portion 634 also falls downward. As a result, the corner portion 536 that contacts the second link portion 634 moves downward.
As described above, finally, the process proceeds to the initial form shown in FIG. 34-8 (a).

  As described above, in the deformable portion 53 of the present embodiment, when lifting, the shoulder portion 533 and the arm portion 534 are moved upward using the power of the face portion 531 to be driven. On the other hand, when lowering, the structure is simplified so that the shoulder 533 and the arm 534 are lowered by their own weight.

  It is assumed that the shoulder portion 533 and the arm portion 534 are not lowered downward due to their own weight. In such a case, as shown in FIG. 34-8 (a), the protrusion 531P contacts the second protrusion 6322P of the contact moving part 632 by moving the face 531 downward. Then, the contact moving part 632 is forcibly pushed down by the face part 531. As a result, the shoulder part 533 and the arm part 534 connected to the contact moving part 632 move downward. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the shoulder portion 533 and the arm portion 534 are configured to move downward with their own weight, and the shoulder portion 533 and the arm portion 534 do not move with their own weight, the shoulder portion 533 is used. The arm 534 is forcibly pushed down.

(Structure of the left-right direction moving part 64)
As shown in FIG. 34-7, the left-right direction moving unit 64 includes a first guided portion 641 and a second guided portion 642.
The first guided portion 641 includes an arc portion 6411 having an arc shape and a base connecting portion 6412 connected to the base body portion 611. Further, the arc portion 6411 and the base connecting portion 6412 are attached so as to sandwich the base main body portion 521 at a location where a first base guide 522 of the base main body portion 521 described later is formed. In the present embodiment, the arc portion 6411 is disposed on the rear side of the base body portion 521, and the base connecting portion 6412 is disposed on the front side of the base body portion 521 (see FIG. 34-10 described later).

The arc portion 6411 is a member formed in an arc shape and is fixed to the base connecting portion 6412. Further, the arc portion 6411 is fitted into a first base guide 522 described later, and extends from one end 522S of the first base guide 522 to the other end 522E (see FIG. 34-9 described later) along the first base guide 522. Moving.
The base connecting portion 6412 is a member formed in a substantially arc shape, and includes a plurality (two in the present embodiment) of convex portions 641P protruding toward the base member 52 (see FIG. 34-1, etc.) side. Have. The convex portion 641P is fitted into the first guide groove 611G1 of the base body portion 611.

  The second guided portion 642 includes an arc portion 6421 and a rack gear portion 6422 fixed to the arc portion 6421. The arc portion 6421 and the rack gear portion 6422 are attached so as to sandwich the base body portion 521 at a location where a second base guide 523 of the base body portion 521 described later is formed. In the present embodiment, arc portion 6421 is disposed on the rear side of base body portion 521, and rack gear portion 6422 is disposed on the front side of base body portion 521 (see FIG. 34-10 described later).

The arc portion 6421 is a member formed in an arc shape, and is fixed to the rack gear portion 6422. The arc portion 6421 is fitted into a second base guide 523 described later, and extends from one end 523S of the second base guide 523 to the other end 523E (see FIG. 34-9 described later) along the second base guide 523. Moving.
The rack gear portion 6422 is a member formed in a substantially arc shape, and includes a plurality of (two in this embodiment) protruding toward the rack gear portion 642G and the base member 52 (see FIG. 34-1, etc.) side. Convex portion 642P. The rack gear portion 6422 has a rack gear formed on the side facing a pinion gear 525 described later. Further, the convex portion 642P is fitted into the second guide groove 611G2 of the base body portion 611.

FIG. 34-9 is a diagram illustrating the base member 52 of the present embodiment. 34-9 is a view of the base member 52 as seen from the front side.
(Configuration of base member 52)
The base member 52 is provided on the rear side of the base body 521, the first base guide 522 formed in the base body 521, the second base guide 523 formed in the base body 521, and the base body 521. A second drive motor 524, and a pinion gear 525 connected to the motor shaft of the second drive motor 524.

  The base body 521 is a plate-like member that serves as a basis for attaching various members. In the present embodiment, base main body 521 is attached to the rear surface of game board 110. The base main body 521 is fixed to a predetermined member inside the pachinko gaming machine 100.

The first base guide 522 is an arc-shaped groove formed so as to protrude downward. The first base guide 522 has one end 522S on the left side in the left-right direction and the other end 522E on the right side. Then, the one end portion 522S determines the position of the arc portion 6411 (see FIG. 34-7) of the left-right direction moving portion 64 so that the deformable portion 53 of the moving portion 51 is located at the standby position. The other end 522E determines the position of the arc portion 6411 (see FIG. 34-7) of the left-right direction moving portion 64 so that the deformable portion 53 is located at the appearance position.
In the present embodiment, the first base guide 522 has a vertical groove 522T extending along the vertical direction at a substantially central portion in the horizontal direction. The vertical groove 522T guides the movement of the guided protrusion 611P (see FIG. 34-7) of the base body 611.

  The second base guide 523 is an arc-shaped groove formed so as to protrude upward. The second base guide 523 has one end 523S on the left side in the left-right direction and the other end 523E on the right side. The one end 523S is formed at substantially the same position as the one end 522S of the first base guide 522 in the left-right direction. On the other hand, the other end 523E is formed at a position on the right side of the other end 522E of the first base guide 522 in the left-right direction. Then, the one end portion 523S is determined so that the decoration portion 54 of the moving portion 51 is located at the standby position. The other end 523E is determined so that the decorative portion 54 is located at the second appearance position.

  The second drive motor 524 is connected to the pinion gear 525 and drives the pinion gear 525. The second drive motor 524 is controlled by the lamp control unit 320 and operates the pinion gear 525 by rotation in a predetermined timing and a predetermined direction.

  The pinion gear 525 is connected to the rack gear part 642G of the moving part 51. The pinion gear 525 converts the rotational motion of the second drive motor 524 into movement along the arc of the second guided portion 642.

(Operation of the left-right direction moving part 64)
FIG. 34-10 is a diagram for explaining the movement of the position of the moving unit 51.
34-10 is a view of the base member 52 as seen from the rear side. Moreover, in FIG. 34-10, the member which concerns on the movement of a position among the base member 52 and the moving part 51 is shown in figure, and description of another member is abbreviate | omitted.
As shown in FIG. 34-10 (a), in a state where the moving part 51 is located at the standby position, the arc part 6411 of the first guided part 641 contacts the one end part 522S of the first base guide 522. ing. Further, the arc portion 6421 of the second guided portion 642 is in contact with the one end portion 523S of the second base guide 523.

  Thereafter, the pinion gear 525 is driven to move the second guided portion 642 to the right in the left-right direction via the rack gear portion 6422. As the second guided portion 642 moves, the entire decorative portion 54 and the deformable portion 53 move to the right in the left-right direction. And as shown to FIG. 34-10 (b), the circular arc part 6411 of the 1st to-be-guided part 641 abuts on the other end part 522E. If it does so, the 1st to-be-guided part 641 and the base main-body part 611 cannot move relatively in the left-right direction. Therefore, the movement in the left-right direction (arc direction) of the deformable portion 53 supported by the base main body portion 611 stops at the appearance position.

Further, the pinion gear 525 is driven to move the second guided portion 642 to the right side. Then, the first guided portion 641 does not move as described above, but the second guided portion 642 further moves toward the right side. The decorative portion 54 is fixed to the second guided portion 642. Therefore, the decoration part 54 moves further in a state where the movement of the deformation part 53 is stopped.
As shown in FIG. 34-10 (c), the arc portion 6421 of the second guided portion 642 abuts against the other end portion 523E of the second base guide 523. At this time, the movement of the decorative portion 54 attached to the second guided portion 642 in the left-right direction (arc direction) stops at the second appearance position.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the movement in the left-right direction (arc direction) of the deforming portion 53 and the decorative portion 54 constituting the moving portion 51 and the predetermined position are performed by the left-right moving portion 64 and the base member 52. Is stopped.

34-11 is a diagram for explaining the vibration operation of the deformable portion 53 in the vertical direction.
Next, the vertical movement of the deformable portion 53 that occurs when the decorative portion 54 moves while the movement of the deformable portion 53 is stopped will be described with reference to FIGS.

  The state shown in FIG. 34-11 (a) is a state in which the deformable portion 53 is located at the appearance position as described with reference to FIG. 34-10 (c). Then, from this state, the second guided portion 642 is moved toward the right side. At this time, with the arc portion 6411 of the first guided portion 641 abutting against the other end portion 522E (see FIGS. 34-11 (b)) of the first base guide 522, the second guided portion 642 is directed to the right side. Will be moved.

  The convex portion 642P of the second guided portion 642 is fitted in the second guide groove 611G2 of the base body portion 611. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 34-11 (b), when the second guided portion 642 moves to the right side, an upward force acts on the base main body portion 611. Here, the second guided portion 642 and the first guided portion 641 are fitted into the second base guide 523 and the first base guide 522, respectively. Therefore, the second guided portion 642 and the first guided portion 641 do not move in the vertical direction.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 34-11 (c), the base main body 611 moves upward. That is, the deformable portion 53 moves so as to be lifted upward.
Note that the base body 611 has a first guide groove 611G1 extending in the vertical direction, and therefore the vertical movement is not hindered by the first guided portion 641. Further, when the base main body 611 moves in the vertical direction, the guided protrusion 611P is guided by the vertical groove 522T.

  When the second guided portion 642 is moved to the left in the left-right direction from the state shown in FIG. 34-11 (c), the convex portion 642P that fits in the second guide groove 611G2 causes the base main body portion 611 to move. A downward force is applied. As a result, the base main body 611 moves downward. That is, the deformable portion 53 moves so as to be lowered downward.

  In the moving part 51 and the base member 52 configured as described above, at the appearance position, for example, an operation of moving the decoration part 54 in a direction separating the decoration part 54 from the deformation part 53 and an operation of moving the decoration part 54 in the direction of merging periodically By repeating, the deformation | transformation part 53 can be rock | fluctuated to the up-down direction, and the decoration part 54 can be rock | fluctuated to the left-right direction. For example, the swinging of the deformable portion 53 in the vertical direction and the swinging of the decorative portion 54 in the left-right direction in the first expected effect and the second expected effect described above can be realized by this operation.

  In addition, the moving direction of the moving part 51 in this Embodiment is not restricted to this Embodiment. Further, the position where the vehicle-type robot unit 5 is arranged is not limited to the lower side of the game board 110 of the present embodiment. For example, the vehicle-type robot unit 5 may be arranged on the right or left side in the left-right direction and the upper side in the up-down direction on the game board 110.

Moreover, the timing which operates the moving part 51 is not limited when the fluctuation production from the fluctuation | variation start of the decoration symbol 30A in the image display part 114 to a fluctuation | variation stop is performed as mentioned above.
For example, the moving unit 51 may be operated to notify the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 100, such as a high probability state or a short time state, separately from the timing of whether or not to win the jackpot. At this time, the timing at which the moving unit 51 is operated to notify the gaming state may be a predetermined timing before the transition to the specific gaming state or after the transition to the specific gaming state.
Further, as shown in FIG. 1, a game ball may win the second grand prize opening 127, and for example, when moving to the high probability state or when shifting to the short time state, the moving unit 51 may be operated. .
Then, when the moving unit 51 shifts to the appearance state, it is suggested or notified to the player when any change occurs in the gaming state or at timings before and after the change of the gaming state. It doesn't matter.

[Technical features of the vehicle-type robot unit 5 of the present embodiment]
As described above, in the present embodiment, the following configuration is adopted in order to enhance the fun of the gaming machine using the director.
That is, the gaming machine (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 100) includes a first effect body (for example, the deforming unit 53) having a first form and a second form deformed from the first form, and the first effect body ( For example, a second effect body (for example, a decoration portion 54) that forms a state integrated with the deformation portion 53) and a separated state separated from the first effect body (for example, the deformation portion 53) is provided. Before the first effect body (for example, the deforming portion 53) shifts to the second form, the first effect body (for example, the deforming portion 53) swings in a predetermined direction while the second effect body. (For example, the decorative portion 54) swings in a direction different from the predetermined direction.
In addition, the gaming machine (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 100) includes a first effect body (for example, the deforming portion 53) having a first form and a second form deformed from the first form, and the first effect body ( For example, a second effect body (for example, a decoration portion 54) that forms a state integrated with the deformation portion 53) and a separated state separated from the first effect body (for example, the deformation portion 53) is provided. The second effect body (for example, the decorative portion 54) moves together with the first effect body (for example, the deforming portion 53) in the integrated state, and the first effect body (for example, for example, in the middle of the movement). A separation state is formed with respect to the deformation portion 53).

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the following configuration is adopted in order to enhance the fun of the gaming machine using the director.
That is, a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 100) includes a rendering body (for example, a deforming unit 53) that performs a rendering operation that transforms the first form into a second form different from the first form. , A pachinko gaming machine 100), and a moving means (for example, a left-right direction moving section 64, a base member 52) for moving the effect body (for example, the deforming section 53) from the first position to the second position; Deformation means (for example, vertical movement unit 62, deformation mechanism unit 63) for deforming the effect body (for example, deformation unit 53) into the first form and the second form is provided.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the following configuration is adopted in order to enhance the fun of the gaming machine using the director.
That is, the gaming machine (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 100) has a first form and an effect body (for example, the deformation unit 53) having a second form different from the first form, and the effect body (for example, the deformation type). Moving means (for example, left-right direction moving part 64, base member 52), and the moving means (for example, left-right direction moving part 64, base member 52) moves the stage ( For example, before the transformation part 53) shifts to the second form, the effect body (for example, the transformation part 53) is swung.

◆ In this embodiment, the following configuration is adopted in order to enhance the fun of the gaming machine using the director.
That is, the gaming machine (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 100) is a gaming machine (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 100) that includes a rendering body (for example, the deforming unit 53) that performs the rendering operation, and the first machine A moving means (for example, a left-right direction moving unit 64, a base member 52) for moving the effector (for example, the deforming unit 53) to a second position which is a position different from the position of 1, and the first position First swinging means (for example, left-right direction moving unit 64, base member 52) for swinging the effect body (for example, the deforming portion 53) in a predetermined direction, and the effect body at the second position in the predetermined direction. 2nd rocking | fluctuation means (For example, the deformation | transformation part base 61, the left-right direction moving part 64, the base member 52) is provided.
In addition, the gaming machine (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 100) is a gaming machine (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 100) including a rendering body (for example, the deforming unit 53) that performs the rendering operation, and the first machine from the first position. Moving means (for example, the left-right direction moving part 64, base member 52) for moving the effector (for example, the deforming part 53) to a second position that is different from the position of 1, and the second position Deformation means (for example, vertical movement unit 62, deformation mechanism unit 63) for deforming the effect body (for example, deformation unit 53) from the first form to a second form different from the first form, and the first First position swinging means (for example, left-right moving unit 64, base member 52) for swinging the effector (for example, the deformable portion 53) in the direction toward the second position at the position; Change to the second form at position 2 And a second position swinging means (for example, the deforming part base 61, the left-right direction moving part 64, and the base member 52) for swinging the effect body (for example, the deforming part 53) in the direction to be performed. .

Next, the title logo part 7 included in the movable accessory 115 will be described.
<Title logo part 7>
FIG. 35A is a diagram for explaining the title logo portion 7 of the present embodiment.
As illustrated in FIG. 35A, the title logo unit 7 includes a rendering body 70 that executes a predetermined rendering and a support body 80 that supports the rendering body 70.
Hereinafter, each of the effect body 70 and the support body 80 will be described in detail.

<Director 70>
FIG. 35-2 is a diagram for explaining the effect body 70 of the present embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 35B, the effect body 70 includes a reversal operation unit 71 that performs a reversal operation in a predetermined performance, and a reversal drive unit 73 that supports the reversal operation unit 71 and supplies a driving force to the reversal operation unit 71. With.

The inversion operation unit 71 includes a first inversion operation unit 71A, a second inversion operation unit 71B, a third inversion operation unit 71C, and a fourth inversion operation unit 71D. The first inversion operation unit 71A to the fourth inversion operation unit 71D gather to form a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape (predetermined shape) (see FIG. 35-1). Here, the predetermined shape refers to a shape (aggregate) in which the first inversion operation unit 71A to the fourth inversion operation unit 71D are grouped as a whole. More specifically, it refers to a shape reminiscent of the first reversal operation unit 71A to the fourth reversal operation unit 71D being one set associated with each other.
In the following description, when any one of the first inversion operation unit 71A to the fourth inversion operation unit 71D is not distinguished, each of the first inversion operation unit 71A to the fourth inversion operation unit 71D is simply inverted. It may be called the operation part 71.
The inversion driving unit 73 includes a substantially disc-shaped main body portion 73A provided at a position surrounded by the first inversion operation portion 71A to the fourth inversion operation portion 71D, and a substantially rectangular parallelepiped support extending from the main body portion 73A to the right in the left-right direction. Part 73B.

<First Inversion Operation Unit 71A>
FIG. 35C is a diagram for explaining the first inversion operation unit 71A.
As illustrated in FIG. 35C, the first reversing operation unit 71A includes a decorative piece 711, a rotation shaft 713, a slide unit 715, and an extendable arm 717. Although the first inversion operation unit 71A is illustrated and described here, the second inversion operation unit 71B, the third inversion operation unit 71C, and the fourth inversion operation unit 71D are also shaped (patterns) of the decorative piece 711. The configuration is the same as that of the first inversion operation unit 71A except for the differences.

The decorative piece 711 is a small piece that performs a reversal operation. The decorative piece 711 includes a through hole (not shown) through which the rotation shaft 713 passes. In addition, the decorative piece 711 in the illustrated example includes a first decorative plate 711A and a second decorative plate 711C provided substantially parallel to each other, and the outer peripheral surface of each of the first decorative plate 711A and the second decorative plate 711C. Are formed with different patterns, specifically, different characters (character strings).
The rotating shaft 713 is a shaft-like member provided through the interior of the decorative piece 711. In addition, the rotating shaft 713 in the illustrated example includes a flat surface (D cut) 713A formed on the outer peripheral surface, and prevents the rotating shaft 713 from rotating in the decorative piece 711.
The slide part 715 is a substantially cylindrical member through which the rotation shaft 713 passes.
The telescopic arm 717 is a long member whose one end is connected to the slide portion 715.

Now, the decorative piece 711 and the slide part 715 are provided so as to be connected to each other and are slidable along the rotation shaft 713.
Further, the decorative piece 711 is fixed at a circumferential position with respect to the rotation shaft 713. On the other hand, the position of the slide part 715 in the circumferential direction with respect to the rotation shaft 713 is not fixed. Thus, the rotation shaft 713 can rotate inside the slide portion 715 while rotating together with the decorative piece 711.

The decorative piece 711 performs a reversing operation. More specifically, the decorative piece 711 performs a reversal operation by performing a rotational motion (see arrow A2) that rotates around the rotational shaft 713 and an expansion / contraction (see arrow A4) that moves along the rotational shaft 713. .
Here, the decorative piece 711 rotates in the forward and backward directions (see arrow A2) as the rotating shaft 713 rotates in the forward and reverse directions (see arrow A1). Further, as the elastic arm 717 moves (see arrow A3), the decorative piece 711 performs an expansion / contraction motion (slide movement, see arrow A4) along the rotation shaft 713.
Note that the slide portion 715 does not rotate with the rotation shaft 713 even when the rotation shaft 713 rotates (see arrow A1). Here, the slide part 715 can be regarded as a support part that rotatably supports the rotating shaft 713.

<Magnet 775>
FIG. 35D is a diagram for explaining the configuration of the magnet 775.
Here, although the description is omitted above, the reversing operation unit 71 includes a magnet 775 as illustrated in FIG. Hereinafter, the magnet 775 will be described.
First, in the illustrated example, the magnet 775 includes a first magnet 775A to a sixth magnet 775F. Each of the first magnet 775A to the sixth magnet 775F is provided in the first reversing operation unit 71A to the fourth reversing operation unit 71D.

  More specifically, the first reversing operation unit 71A includes a first magnet 775A provided in a region facing the third reversing operation unit 71C and a second magnet provided in a region facing the second reversing operation unit 71B. 775B. The second reversing operation unit 71B includes a third magnet 775C provided to attract the second magnet 775B in a region facing the first reversing operation unit 71A. The third reversing operation unit 71C is provided in a region facing the first reversing operation unit 71A, a fourth magnet 775D provided so as to attract the first magnet 775A, and a region confronting the fourth reversing operation unit 71D. And a fifth magnet 775E. The fourth reversing operation unit 71D includes a sixth magnet 775F provided so as to attract the fifth magnet 775E in a region facing the third reversing operation unit 71C.

  In addition, each of the first magnet 775A to the sixth magnet 775F is disposed so that the opposing magnets have opposite poles. Therefore, the first magnet 775A to the sixth magnet 775F attract each other by the magnetic force, so that the adjacent ones of the first reversing operation unit 71A to the fourth reversing operation unit 71D are adjacent to each other. maintain. More specifically, the magnet 775 stably reproduces the position when the first reversing operation unit 71A to the fourth reversing operation unit 71D are gathered by the magnetic force.

  Note that all the positions of the first inversion operation unit 71A to the fourth inversion operation unit 71D need only be determined. In the illustrated example, the inversion operation unit 71 includes the second inversion operation unit 71B and the fourth inversion operation unit 71D. The magnet 775 is not provided in the area where the two face each other. However, the positional relationship between the first inversion operation unit 71A and the second inversion operation unit 71B, the positional relationship between the first inversion operation unit 71A and the third inversion operation unit 71C, and the third inversion operation unit 71C and the fourth inversion operation unit. Since the positional relationship with 71D is determined by the magnets 775, all positions of the first reversing operation unit 71A to the fourth reversing operation unit 71D are determined.

  Here, unlike the illustrated example, the magnet 775 that attracts each other may also be provided in a region where the second inversion operation unit 71B and the fourth inversion operation unit 71D face each other. In addition, at least one of the first inversion operation unit 71A to the fourth inversion operation unit 71D is configured to attract the other adjacent one of the first inversion operation unit 71A to the fourth inversion operation unit 71D by magnetic force. For example, any one of the first inversion operation unit 71 </ b> A to the fourth inversion operation unit 71 </ b> D may include a magnet 775.

Also, in the state where the first inversion operation unit 71A to the fourth inversion operation unit 71D perform the inversion operation from the state shown in FIG. 35-4 and the second decorative plate 711C is disposed on the front side in the front-rear direction, the magnet 775 It is good to provide in the position where each attracts each other. More specifically, the magnet 775 provided in each of the first reversing operation unit 71A to the fourth reversing operation unit 71D is configured so that the first reversing operation unit 71A to the fourth reversing operation unit 71D rotate from the root of the rotation shaft 713 to the rotation shaft. It is good to provide each at a position that is a predetermined distance along 713 and that is separated from the rotation shaft 713 by a predetermined distance in the radial direction of the rotation shaft 713.
Thereby, the proximity state of the first inversion operation unit 71A to the fourth inversion operation unit 71D is maintained before and after performing the inversion operation.

<Inversion driving unit 73>
FIG. 35-5 is a diagram for explaining the inversion driving unit 73.
As shown in FIG. 35-5, the reversing drive unit 73 rotates by rotating the rotating shaft 713 in response to the drive from the drive mechanism 731 that supplies the drive force and the drive mechanism 731 to rotate the decorative piece 711. A cover 736 that covers the front side of the mechanism 733 and an expansion / contraction mechanism 735 that moves the expansion / contraction arm 717 in response to driving from the drive mechanism 731 to execute the expansion / contraction operation of the decorative piece 711, and the front side of the drive mechanism 731, the rotation mechanism 733, and the expansion / contraction mechanism 735. With.

The drive mechanism 731 includes a first motor 737, a first drive shaft 739, and a drive gear body 741.
The first motor 737 is constituted by a drive motor of the drive mechanism 731 and rotates in the forward direction and the reverse direction.
The first drive shaft 739 is a shaft-like member that is rotated by the first motor 737 and extends along the left-right direction. In addition, the first drive shaft 739 includes a first bevel gear 739A at one end opposite to the first motor 737. The first drive shaft 739 is disposed in the same plane as the rotation shaft 713 and the telescopic arm 717 of the reversing operation unit 71.
The drive gear body 741 is a gear group that rotates by receiving a drive from the first bevel gear 739A of the first drive shaft 739. Specifically, the drive gear body 741 includes a second bevel gear 741A that meshes with the first bevel gear 739A of the first drive shaft 739, a second drive shaft 741B that is a rotation shaft of the second bevel gear 741A, and a second A first drive gear 741C that is provided at one end on the front side of the drive shaft 741B and transmits driving force to the rotation mechanism 733, and is provided at one end on the rear side of the second drive shaft 741B and that transmits driving force to the telescopic mechanism 735. A second drive gear 741D.

Here, the operation of the inversion driving unit 73 will be described.
The first drive gear 741C and the second drive gear 741D rotate (arrow B2, arrow B3) as the first drive shaft 739 rotates (see arrow B1) under the drive of the first motor 737 of the drive mechanism 731. reference). As a result, the driving force is transmitted to the rotation mechanism 733 and the expansion / contraction mechanism 735. The rotating mechanism 733 that receives the driving force causes the reversing operation unit 71 to perform a rotating motion, and the telescopic mechanism 735 that receives the driving force causes the reversing operating unit 71 to perform a stretching motion.

<Extension mechanism 735>
FIG. 35-6 is a diagram for explaining the telescopic mechanism 735.
Next, the telescopic mechanism 735 will be described with reference to FIG. 35-6.
As shown in FIG. 35-6, the expansion / contraction mechanism 735 includes an expansion / contraction rotation disk 765 and a first fixing pin 765B provided at a radially outer position on the rear surface of the expansion / contraction rotation disk 765. In addition, one end 717A of the telescopic arm 717 is rotatably fixed to the first fixing pin 765B of the telescopic rotating disk 765. Further, the other end 717 </ b> B of the telescopic arm 717 is fixed to the second fixing pin 715 </ b> A of the slide portion 715. Further, the slide portion 715 is provided so as to be movable along the rotation shaft 713.

  When the thus configured telescopic rotating disk 765 rotates (see arrow D1), one end 717A of the telescopic arm 717 connected to the first fixing pin 765B moves along the circumferential direction of the telescopic rotating disk 765. To do. At this time, the other end 717 </ b> B of the telescopic arm 717 moves along the rotation shaft 713. As a result, as the telescopic rotating disk 765 rotates (see arrow D1), the slide portion 715 moves along the rotation shaft 713 (see arrow A4).

<Operation of Inversion Operation Unit 71>
35-7 to 35-10 are diagrams for explaining the operation of the inversion operation unit 71. FIG.
Next, the operation of the reversing operation unit 71 will be described with reference to FIGS. 35-7 to 35-10.
First, as shown in FIG. 35-7 (a), before the reversing operation unit 71 starts the reversing operation, the first reversing operation unit 71A to the fourth reversing operation unit 71D are gathered at positions (aggregation positions). Placed in.

Further, at this gathering position, the first decorative plate 711A included in each of the first reverse operation unit 71A to the fourth reverse operation unit 71D faces the front side, and the first decorative plate 711A is visible to the player. Further, these four first decorative plates 711A are disposed so that their sides are abutted against each other and in contact with each other. Further, these four first decorative plates 711A form a display portion 71E as one surface, and a character string “BIG CHANGE” is formed on this surface. This character string is a character string indicating the model of the pachinko gaming machine 100, a so-called title logo.
Further, at this gathering position, the four first decorative plates 711A receive from the player the main body 73A (see FIG. 35-7 (b)) in which the rotation mechanism 733 and the expansion / contraction mechanism 735 in the reversal drive unit 73 are accommodated. It will be in a state of covering. More specifically, the first decorative plate 711A and the second decorative plate 711C sandwich the main body 73A in the front-rear direction.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 35-7 (b), when the inversion operation unit 71 receives the drive from the inversion drive unit 73 and starts the inversion operation, the first inversion operation unit 71A to the fourth inversion operation unit 71D Separate from each other. That is, the first reversing operation unit 71A to the fourth reversing operation unit 71D each expand radially from the set position (see arrow A41). The radial shape means a shape emitted from the central point toward the outside. In the illustrated example, the first inversion operation unit 71A to the fourth inversion operation unit 71D spread all at once (simultaneously) in the radial direction. In the state shown in FIG. 35-7 (b), the rotation around the rotation shaft 713 of each of the first reversing operation unit 71A to the fourth reversing operation unit 71D is not started or has been started. Even so, the amount of movement is smaller than the movement in which the first inversion operation unit 71A to the fourth inversion operation unit 71D expand radially (see arrow A41).

Then, as shown in FIG. 35-8 (c), the first inversion operation unit 71A to the fourth inversion operation unit 71D rotate around the rotation shaft 713 while spreading. In other words, each of the first inversion operation unit 71A to the fourth inversion operation unit 71D performs a spiral operation (spiral operation) in a direction extending along the radial direction, that is, in the moving direction (see arrow A42). In other words, each of the first reversing operation unit 71A to the fourth reversing operation unit 71D moves while being twisted around the rotation shaft 713. At this time, the first inversion operation unit 71A, the fourth inversion operation unit 71D, the second inversion operation unit 71B, and the third inversion operation unit 71C perform spiral operations in opposite directions. That is, the first reversing operation unit 71A, the fourth reversing operation unit 71D, the second reversing operation unit 71B, and the third reversing operation unit 71C perform expansion and contraction movements in directions away from each other and rotation movements in opposite directions. .
Then, as shown in FIG. 35-8 (d), the decorative pieces 711 of the first reversing operation unit 71A to the fourth reversing operation unit 71D are arranged at the most distal end side of the rotating shaft 713.

Next, as shown in FIG. 35-9 (e), the first reversing operation unit 71A to the fourth reversing operation unit 71D rotate around the rotation shaft 713 while approaching (collecting) each other. In other words, each of the first inversion operation unit 71A to the fourth inversion operation unit 71D performs a helical operation in a direction in which the first inversion operation unit 71A to the fourth inversion operation unit 71 gather together along the radial direction (see arrow A43). At this time, the first inversion operation unit 71A, the fourth inversion operation unit 71D, the second inversion operation unit 71B, and the third inversion operation unit 71C perform spiral operations in opposite directions. That is, the first reversing operation unit 71A, the fourth reversing operation unit 71D, the second reversing operation unit 71B, and the third reversing operation unit 71C perform a telescopic motion in a direction approaching each other, and perform a rotational motion in opposite directions to each other. .
Then, as shown in FIG. 35-9 (f), the second decorative plate 711C included in each of the first reverse operation unit 71A to the fourth reverse operation unit 71D is disposed on the front side, and the second decorative plate 711C is provided by the player. In the visible state, the user further approaches (see arrow A44).

  Then, as shown in FIG. 35-10 (g), the first inversion operation unit 71A to the fourth inversion operation unit 71D are again arranged at the assembly position. At this time, the four second decorative plates 711C included in the first reversing operation unit 71A to the fourth reversing operation unit 71D are disposed such that their sides abut each other and contact each other. Further, these four second decorative plates 711C form a display portion 71E which is one surface, and form a character string “GREAT” as the second surface. At this time, the first reversing operation unit 71A to the fourth reversing operation unit 71D are in a state where the player can see the opposite surface (back surface) to that shown in FIG. 35-7 (a). Further, the four second decorative plates 711 </ b> C are positions that cover the main body 73 </ b> A (see FIG. 35-7 (b)) in the inversion driving unit 73 as viewed from the player.

  Thereafter, the reversal operation unit 71 receives the drive from the reversal drive unit 73 and returns to the state shown in FIG. 35-7 (a). That is, the reversing operation unit 71 receives the driving force in the opposite direction from the reversing driving unit 73 while receiving the driving force in the direction opposite to the above, FIG. 35-10 (g), FIG. 35-9 (f), FIG. The state returns to the state shown in FIG. 35-7 (a) again through the states of 35-8 (d), FIG. 35-8 (c), and FIG. 35-7 (b) in this order.

  Here, FIG. 35-10 (h) is a diagram of the reversing operation unit 71 viewed from the back side, that is, the rear side of the reversing operation unit 71 shown in FIG. 35-10 (g). As shown in FIG. 35-10 (h), the first decorative plate 711A that is reversed and arranged toward the rear side has a character string “BIG CHANGE” as shown in FIG. 35-7 (a). They are not configured and are arranged in different directions. In addition, although not shown, the second decorative plate 711C disposed toward the rear side in the state shown in FIG. 35-7 (a) is also “GREAT” as shown in FIG. 35-10 (g). Are not arranged, and are arranged in different directions.

Now, as described above, the reversing operation unit 71 performs both the rotation operation and the expansion / contraction operation, and executes the spiral operation, so that, for example, quick deformation can be performed as compared with the configuration in which the rotation operation is performed after the expansion / contraction operation. .
Also, after the reversal operation unit 71 is deformed to separate and gather as described above and the player's attention is drawn, the formation surface is switched between the first surface and the second surface, for example, the reversal operation unit 71 Compared to a configuration in which the formation surfaces of the first surface and the second surface are changed while maintaining the assembled state, a greater impact can be given to the player.

<Modification of the director 70>
Now, a modified example of the effect body 70 will be described.
First, in the above description, it has been described that the first inversion operation unit 71A to the fourth inversion operation unit 71D of the inversion operation unit 71 are driven by a common drive source (first motor 737). Not. For example, the effect body 70 may include a rotation motor (not shown) that supplies a driving force for a rotation operation and a telescopic motor (not shown) that supplies a driving force for an extension operation. With this configuration, the timing for executing the rotation operation and the expansion / contraction operation can be shifted.

Specifically, for example, the first reversing operation unit 71A to the fourth reversing operation unit 71D execute only the rotation operation by stopping the telescopic motor (not illustrated) while driving the rotation motor (not illustrated). It can be made into the state to be made. Alternatively, the first reversing operation unit 71A to the fourth reversing operation unit 71D can be brought into a state where only the expansion / contraction operation is performed by driving the expansion / contraction motor while stopping the rotation motor.
Further, by switching the timing for driving the rotation motor (not shown) and the expansion / contraction motor (not shown), it is possible to perform the spiral operation after performing only the expansion / contraction operation. In addition, when the first reversing operation unit 71A to the fourth reversing operation unit 71D are separated from each other, the first reversing operation unit 71A to the fourth reversing operation unit 71D repeats either the rotation operation or the expansion / contraction operation. The first inversion operation unit 71A to the fourth inversion operation unit 71D can be swung.
Furthermore, when the first reversing operation unit 71A to the fourth reversing operation unit 71D perform the expanding operation and the collecting operation, it is possible to perform either one of the spiral operations and the other to perform the expansion / contraction operation without performing the rotation operation. It becomes. In other words, it is possible to switch whether or not the rotation operation is involved between the spreading process and the gathering process.

Further, for example, each of the first reversing operation unit 71A to the fourth reversing operation unit 71D may include a rotation motor (not shown) and a telescopic motor (not shown). As described above, since the first inversion operation unit 71A to the fourth inversion operation unit 71D each include a separate drive source, the timing at which each of the first inversion operation unit 71A to the fourth inversion operation unit 71D performs the inversion operation is set. It can be shifted.
More specifically, for example, the inversion operation can be started in the order of the first inversion operation unit 71A to the fourth inversion operation unit 71D. Alternatively, a configuration in which a part of the first inversion operation unit 71A to the fourth inversion operation unit 71D performs the inversion operation and the other inversion operation is not performed may be employed. It should be noted that only a part of the first inversion operation unit 71A to the fourth inversion operation unit 71D performs the inversion operation, so that the formation surfaces formed by the first inversion operation unit 71A to the fourth inversion operation unit 71D are switched. Also good.

  In the above description, the first inversion operation unit 71A to the fourth inversion operation unit 71D perform the inversion operation to change from the first surface “BIG CHANGE” to the second surface “GREAT”. explained. However, after the first reversing operation unit 71A to the fourth reversing operation unit 71D rotate in one direction, the same surface may be shown again and stopped. Specifically, each of the first reversing operation unit 71A to the fourth reversing operation unit 71D is moved around the rotation axis 713 from the state in which the first surface “BIG CHANGE” is formed to being separated and reassembled. By rotating 360 degrees, the first surface “BIG CHANGE”, which is the same surface again in the reassembled state, may be formed.

  Further, in the above description, when the first inversion operation unit 71A to the fourth inversion operation unit 71D perform the inversion operation, the first surface “BIG CHANGE” to the second surface “ It has been described that the state changes to “GREAT” and then returns to the first surface “BIG CHANGE” from the second surface “GREAT” while rotating in the opposite direction. However, when changing from the second surface “GREAT” to the first surface “BIG CHANGE”, the same direction as the reversing operation changing from the first surface “BIG CHANGE” to the second surface “GREAT”, ie, You may rotate in one direction.

In the above description, the first inversion operation unit 71A to the fourth inversion operation unit 71D have been described as moving in the radial direction, but the present invention is not limited to this. Any one of the first reversing operation unit 71A to the fourth reversing operation unit 71D may be configured to move away from the other. Therefore, the first inversion operation unit 71A to the fourth inversion operation unit 71D may be configured to move away from each other by moving in the up-down direction and the left-right direction. Alternatively, one of the first inversion operation unit 71A to the fourth inversion operation unit 71D does not move, and the other three of the first inversion operation unit 71A to the fourth inversion operation unit 71D move. Only a part of the first inversion operation unit 71A to the fourth inversion operation unit 71D is moved so that the first inversion operation unit 71A to the fourth inversion operation unit 71D are separated from each other in the radial direction. There may be.
Furthermore, although it has been described that the first inversion operation unit 71A to the fourth inversion operation unit 71D are provided, as long as a plurality of the inversion operation units 71A to 71D are provided, the number may be two, three, or five or more. .

  In the above description, it has been described that the character string changes between the first surface “BIG CHANGE” and the second surface “GREAT”. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The first surface and the second surface may have different impressions to the player. For example, the first surface and the second surface may have different colors, different materials, or patterns. Different configurations may be used. More specifically, the first decorative plate 711A and the second decorative plate 711C may be provided with display means such as an LED or a liquid crystal display, and the display means may display different colors and patterns. It should be noted that the configuration in which the impression given to the player is the same on the first surface and the second surface is not excluded. Specifically, the patterns (character strings) formed on the surfaces of the first decorative plate 711A and the second decorative plate 711C may match each other.

Further, the first decorative plate 711A and the second decorative plate 711C that form the first surface and the second surface do not have to be planar members, but are surfaces having irregularities such as a spherical surface. Of course. In addition, the first reversing operation unit 71A to the fourth reversing operation unit 71D each include a spherical decorative member (not shown) instead of the first decorative plate 711A and the second decorative plate 711C, and rotate the spherical decorative member. It may be rotated around the axis 713 and moved along the rotation axis 713.
Further, the angle of rotation around the rotation axis 713 in accordance with the reversing operation is not particularly limited, and in addition to rotating 180 degrees as described above or rotating 360 degrees, for example, rotating 720 degrees, rotating 90 degrees, for example. It may be a configuration such as.

<Support 80>
FIGS. 35-11 and 35-12 are views for explaining the support 80. FIGS. More specifically, FIG. 35-11 is a view of the support body 80 viewed from the left side to the right side, and FIG. 35-12 is a view of the support body 80 viewed from the right side to the left side.
As shown in FIGS. 35-11 and 35-12, the support body 80 includes a base portion 81 and a moving support portion 83 provided so as to be movable along the base portion 81.

<Base 81>
The base 81 is a long member whose longitudinal direction is provided along the vertical direction. The base 81 includes a second motor 811, a first guide groove 813, a second guide groove 815, and a third guide groove 817 that guide the movement support portion 83, and an urging force that applies an urging force to the movement support portion 83. A portion 818, a drive gear group 819 that rotates in response to the drive from the second motor 811, and a rack gear 821 that is fixed to the movement support portion 83 and moves in response to the drive from the drive gear group 819.

The second motor 811 supplies a driving force that drives the movement support portion 83. The second motor 811 includes a second motor gear 811A (see FIG. 35-12).
As shown in FIGS. 35-11, the first guide groove 813 and the third guide groove 817 are substantially linear grooves that are formed on the first surface 81A of the base 81 and extend in the vertical direction.
The second guide groove 815 includes a substantially linear straight portion 815A extending in the vertical direction, and an inclined portion 815B that is continuous with the lower end portion of the linear portion 815A and is inclined in a direction to advance rearward as it advances downward. Is provided. Note that the straight portion 815A and the inclined portion 815B are connected via a bent portion 815C. The second guide groove 815 is provided at a position sandwiched between the first guide groove 813 and the third guide groove 817 in the front-rear direction. More specifically, in the illustrated example, the first guide groove 813, the second guide groove 815, and the third guide groove 817 are formed in this order in the direction from the rear side to the front side in the front-rear direction.

The drive gear group 819 includes a first connection gear 819A to an eighth connection gear 819H. The first connecting gear 819A meshes with the second motor gear 811A. Further, adjacent ones of the first connecting gear 819A to the eighth connecting gear 819H mesh with each other.
The rack gear 821 has a main body 821A that is a long member whose longitudinal direction is provided along the vertical direction, a rack gear portion 821B that is provided on the rear side surface of the main body 821A and meshes with the eighth connection gear 819H, and the main body 821A. A plurality of bolt holes 821C. The rack gear 821 is fixed to the movement support portion 83 via a bolt (not shown) inserted into the bolt hole 821C.

  In the base 81 configured as described above, the second motor gear 811A rotates in the forward direction and the reverse direction (see arrow H1), whereby the drive gear group 819 rotates. As the drive gear group 819 rotates, the rack gear 821 moves in the vertical direction (see arrow H2). As a result, the movement support portion 83 fixed to the rack gear 821 moves along the vertical direction (see arrow H2).

<Biasing part 818>
FIG. 35-13 is a diagram for explaining the biasing portion 818.
Next, the urging unit 818 will be described with reference to FIGS.
As shown in FIG. 35-13, the biasing portion 818 includes a spring 818A provided along the vertical direction, and a moving piece 818B connected to the lower end of the spring 818A and moving along the third guide groove 817. The projection 818C is a portion protruding from the moving piece 818B and disposed in the moving path of the pressing piece 848 provided on the moving support portion 83, and a fixing pin 818D for fixing the upper end of the spring 818A.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 35-13 (a), in the state where the moving support portion 83 that moves in the vertical direction is disposed on the upper side, the pressing piece 848 of the moving support portion 83 is separated from the moving piece 818B. In this state, no force is applied from the moving support portion 83 to the spring 818A. At this time, the protrusion 818C of the moving piece 818B is disposed above the bent portion 815C of the second guide groove 815.

Next, the movement support portion 83 moves downward from the state shown in FIG. Then, the pressing piece 848 of the moving support portion 83 that moves downward contacts the protrusion 818C of the moving piece 818B (see FIG. 35-13 (b)).
Furthermore, the movement support part 83 moves downward from the state shown in FIG. 35-13 (b). Along with this, the moving piece 818B moves downward, and the spring 818A extends (becomes an extended state). Along with this, an urging force (see arrow K1) for moving the pressing piece 848 of the movement support portion 83 upward is applied by the elastic force of the spring 818A. As a result, the urging portion 818 increases the vertical speed of the moving support portion 83 when the moving support portion 83 moving along the second guide groove 815 moves rearward through the bent portion 815C. Decelerate.
When the movement support portion 83 moves upward in the order of FIGS. 35-13 (c), 35-13 (b) and 35-13 (a), the urging portion 818 has a spring 818A. The elastic support force assists the upward movement of the movement support portion 83.

<Moving support part 83>
FIGS. 35-14 is a figure for demonstrating the movement support part 83. FIG.
35-15 and 35-16 are exploded perspective views of the movement support portion 83. FIG. More specifically, FIG. 35-15 is an exploded perspective view of the movement support portion 83 as viewed from the left side to the right side, and FIG. 35-16 is an exploded perspective view of the movement support portion 83 as viewed from the right side to the left side.

  As shown in FIG. 35-14, the movement support part 83 supports the reverse drive part 73 of the effect body 70, and functions as a so-called pedestal. Moreover, the movement support part 83 receives the driving force from the base part 81, and moves the inversion drive part 73 to an up-down direction and the front-back direction.

  As shown in FIGS. 35-15 and 35-16, the movement support portion 83 includes a first guide portion 831 that moves along the first guide groove 813 and a second guide that moves along the second guide groove 815. Part 833, a base 835 fixed to the first guide part 831 and the rack gear 821, a slide part 837 fixed to the second guide part 833 and supporting the reverse drive part 73, and a first guide part 831, a base 835, and a third cable 841 that is electrically connected to the reverse drive unit 73 while being supported by the slide unit 837.

The first guide portion 831 is a plate-like member, and includes a bolt hole 831A, a protruding portion 831B protruding upward, and a first cable opening 831C through which the third cable 841 passes. The first guide portion 831 is disposed in the first guide groove 813 and moves in the first guide groove 813 in a state where the longitudinal direction is along the first guide groove 813.
The second guide portion 833 is a plate-like member, and includes a first guide pin 833A that protrudes from the surface on the base 81 side and a fixed leg 833B that protrudes from the surface on the reverse drive portion 73 side. The second guide portion 833 moves along the second guide groove 815 in a state where the first guide pin 833A is disposed in the second guide groove 815.

  The base 835 is a plate-shaped member, and is reversed with a bolt hole 835A, a disk support portion 835B whose longitudinal direction is a beam-like portion along the front-rear direction, and a first long hole 835C whose longitudinal direction is along the front-rear direction. A first recess 835D that is formed above the first long hole 835C on the surface on the drive unit 73 side and whose longitudinal direction extends along the front-rear direction, and a second recess that is formed above the first recess 835D and whose longitudinal direction extends along the front-rear direction. A long hole 835E and a third long hole 835F, and a second recess 835G formed between the second long hole 835E and the third long hole 835F in the vertical direction on the surface on the reversing drive unit 73 side, the longitudinal direction of which is along the front-rear direction. A second cable opening 835H provided at one end on the rear side of the second recess 835G through which the third cable 841 passes, and a fixed leg 835J protruding from the surface on the base 81 side.

The base 835 is fixed to the first guide portion 831 by a bolt (not shown) inserted into the bolt hole 831A of the first guide portion 831 passing through the bolt hole 835A and being fixed. Further, the fixed leg 835J of the base 835 is disposed in the third guide groove 817. As a result, the first guide portion 831 moves in the first guide groove 813 and the fixed leg 835J moves in the third guide groove 817, whereby the base 835 moves in the vertical direction.
In addition, the fixed legs 833B of the second guide portion 833 are disposed in the second long hole 835E and the third long hole 835F of the base 835. Thus, the movement of the second guide portion 833 relative to the base 835 is restricted in the vertical direction and allowed in the front-rear direction.

  The slide portion 837 is a plate-like member, and is formed on the surface on the reversal drive portion 73 side to receive a third recess 837A that receives the end of the reversal drive portion 73, and a third cable opening 837B through which the third cable 841 passes. And a disk 837C having a rotation axis extending in the vertical direction, second guide pins 837D to 837K protruding from the surface on the base 81 side, and a longitudinal direction formed on the surface on the base 81 side and extending in the longitudinal direction. 4 recesses 837L.

In the slide portion 837, the second guide pin 837D and the third guide pin 837E are disposed in the third long hole 835F of the base 835, and the fourth guide pin 837F and the fifth guide pin 837G are the second long length of the base 835. It arrange | positions in the hole 835E. Further, the sixth guide pin 837H is disposed in the first recess 835D, and the seventh guide pin 837J and the eighth guide pin 837K are disposed in the first long hole 835C. The disk 837C is supported by a disk support portion 835B extending in the front-rear direction.
Thus, the movement of the slide portion 837 relative to the base 835 is restricted in the vertical direction and allowed in the front-rear direction.

  Further, in the slide portion 837, the second guide pin 837D to the fifth guide pin 837G are fixed to the fixing leg 833B of the second guide portion 833 disposed in the second long hole 835E and the third long hole 835F. Is done. For example, in the illustrated example, the second guide pin 837D to the fifth guide pin 837G are fixed by being inserted into the fixed leg 833B. Thus, the slide portion 837 is fixed with respect to the second guide portion 833 and moves together with the second guide portion 833. More specifically, the slide portion 837 moves along the second guide groove 815 together with the second guide portion 833.

<Operation of the moving support unit 83>
FIGS. 35-17 is a figure for demonstrating operation | movement of the movement support part 83. FIG.
Next, the operation of the movement support portion 83 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 35-17. Here, the case where the movement support part 83 moves from the upper side to the lower side will be described.

First, as shown in FIG. 35-17 (a), the slide portion 837 is slidable in the front-rear direction with respect to the base 835 (see arrow J2). Further, the second guide part 833 is fixed to the slide part 837. The first guide pin 833A provided in the second guide portion 833 is in a state of being disposed in the second guide groove 815. The first guide portion 831 fixed to the base 835 is disposed in the first guide groove 813, and the fixed leg 835 J of the base 835 is disposed in the third guide groove 817.
In this state, when the movement support portion 83 is driven, the first guide portion 831, the first guide pin 833A, and the fixed leg 835J move in the first guide groove 813 to the third guide groove 817, respectively. Move downward (see arrow L1).

  When the movement support portion 83 further moves downward, the first guide pin 833A of the second guide portion 833 is guided by the second guide groove 815 as shown in FIG. 35-17 (b). Move to the back. As a result, the slide portion 837 moves rearward with respect to the base 835 (see arrow L2). As a result, the reverse drive unit 73 (the effect body 70) fixed to the slide unit 837 moves to the rear side (see arrow L2).

<Operation of title logo part 7>
35-18 to 35-20 are diagrams for explaining the operation of the title logo section 7. To explain further, FIG. 35-18 shows the title logo part 7 arranged at the non-production position, FIG. 35-19 shows the title logo part 7 arranged at the production position, and FIG. 35-20 shows the title position. The title logo part 7 which is arrange | positioned and performs reverse operation is shown.

Next, the operation of the title logo unit 7 will be described with reference to FIGS. 35-18 to 35-20.
As shown in FIGS. 35-18 (a) and (b), during non-production, the production body 70 of the title logo portion 7 is arranged at a non-production position arranged on the outer periphery of the game board 110. More specifically, the effect body 70 of the title logo portion 7 is arranged above the game board 110 in the up and down direction when not effected, and the right position portion 4b of the transparent plate 90 and the modeling movable body 4 in the front and rear direction. Between the head of the modeling movable body 4 and the decorative portion 89 (described later) in the left-right direction.

Here, as shown in FIG. 35-18 (b), the effect body 70 at the time of non-effect is arranged at a position overlapping the left shoulder in the right position portion 4b of the modeling movable body 4 when viewed from the player side.
In addition, the effect body 70 at the non-effect position is arranged in the left-right direction with a decorative portion 89 that is fixed to the game board 110. Here, in the illustrated example, the decoration portion 89 is formed with a character string “R !!!!”. And the character string “BIG CHANGER !!” is formed by arranging the decoration part 89 and the effect body 70 in which the character string “BIG CHANGE” is formed in the left-right direction. At this time, among the character strings “BIG CHANGE” formed in two upper and lower stages, the character string “CHANGE” located in the lower stage and the decoration portion 89 have “R !!!!” Character strings are arranged in the left-right direction.

  Further, in the effect body 70, the reversal operation unit 71 is moved from the support body 80 arranged in the vertical direction on the side (right side) of the game board 110 to the center side of the game board 110 along the left and right direction (left side). It is supported by the extending reversing drive unit 73. Further, the reversal drive unit 73 of the rendering body 70 at the non-rendering position is covered with the reversing operation unit 71 and the decoration unit 89.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 35-19 (a) and (b), the effector 70 moves downward from the non-effect position (see arrow L1). At this time, the effect body 70 is separated from the decoration part 89 in the vertical direction. As a result, the character string changes from the character string “BIG CHANGER !!” formed with the decoration unit 89 to the character string “BIG CHANGE” formed in the effector 70.
In addition, the effect body 70 moves to the rear side (see arrow L2) as it moves downward (see arrow L1) as described above. Furthermore, as the effector 70 moves downward as described above (see arrow L1), the speed at which the effector 70 moves downward is reduced by the urging unit 818 applying an urging force. .

  Then, the effect body 70 moving downward (see arrow L1) is arranged at the effect position arranged at the position on the center side of the game board 110 (the front side of the image display unit 114). More specifically, the effect body 70 is disposed at the center of the game board 110 in the up-down direction, and is disposed between the transparent plate 90 and the image display unit 114 in the front-rear direction. This effect position can be understood as a position where the effect body 70 covers the image display unit 114.

  Next, as shown in FIGS. 35-20 (a) and (b), the effect body 70 performs the reversing operation at the effect position (see arrow A2). At this time, the effector 70 sandwiched between the transparent plate 90 and the image display unit 114 in the front-rear direction performs a reversing operation without contacting the transparent plate 90 or the image display unit 114.

  The effect body 70 can change the position in the front-rear direction between the non-effect and the effect. In other words, the distance from the transparent plate 90 (see the arrow N1 in FIG. 35-19 (a)) or image display. The distance from the portion 114 (see arrow N2 in FIG. 35-19 (a)) can be changed. In this way, by changing the position of the effect body 70 in the front-rear direction, for example, a space for the effect body 70 to perform the reversing operation is ensured between the transparent plate 90 and the image display unit 114. The effect position of the effect body 70 is set to a position where the effect body 70 performing the reversing operation is separated from the transparent plate 90 and the image display unit 114 without being in contact therewith. Further, the effect body 70 moves in the direction (vertical direction) along the surface of the transparent plate 90, and at the same time, moves in the direction of moving back and forth (front-back direction) with respect to the transparent plate 90. Thus, compared to the configuration different from the example shown in the drawing, that is, compared to the configuration in which the movement is completed in the direction along the surface of the transparent plate 90 and then moved in the direction of moving back and forth with respect to the transparent plate 90, Rapid movement is possible.

  In addition, the effect of the title logo unit 7 is executed to notify the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 100, for example. Thus, the player can grasp or guess the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 by looking at the effect of the title logo section 7. Specifically, for example, when the gaming state becomes a high probability state or when the gaming state becomes a short-time state as a result of the lottery, the title logo unit 7 performs the rendering, that is, the rendering body 70 is reversed. do. As a result, the player can know the gaming state. More specifically, for example, after the decorative symbol 91 for notifying the player of the lottery result is displayed on the image display unit 114, the effect body 70 moves from the non-effect position to the effect position and executes the reversing operation. . In addition, the title logo portion 7 performs a reversal operation and shows the characters “GREAT” to the player, so that the user can guess that the player has entered a high probability state.

  In addition, the timing which operates the title logo part 7 is not limited after the decoration design 91 for alert | reporting a lottery result is displayed. For example, it may be a time when a variation effect from the variation start to the variation stop of the decorative design 91 is performed. Further, it may be a predetermined timing before the transition to the specific gaming state or after the transition to the specific gaming state. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, when the game ball is won in the second grand prize opening 127, for example, when shifting to the high probability state or when shifting to the short time state, the title logo portion 7 may be operated. good.

  Here, the effect of the title logo part 7 does not necessarily have to be accompanied by the reversal operation of the effector 70. For example, the effect of the title logo unit 7 is executed by repeating (swinging) the effector 70 moving (lowering) a predetermined distance from the non-effecting position and returning (raising) to the non-effecting position again. May be. Further, after the effector 70 has moved from the non-effect position to the effect position, it may return to the non-effect position without performing the reversing operation. Alternatively, after the effector 70 moves from the non-effect position to the effect position, only the expansion / contraction operation is performed without performing the rotation operation, that is, the reversing operation unit 71 performs only the operation of separating and gathering without performing the rotation operation. Later, you may return to the non-production position again. By performing these effects, the player's expectation for the reversing operation of the title logo portion 7 can be given.

<Modified example of production position / non-production position>
The movement between the effect position and the non-effect position is not limited to the above description as long as the effector 70 performs an operation of moving forward and backward with respect to the transparent plate 90.
For example, the support 80 includes a vertical movement motor (not shown) that moves the effector 70 in the vertical direction and a left and right movement motor (not shown) that moves in the horizontal direction, and the driving is different in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction. A source may be provided. In this configuration, the effector 70 may start moving along the front-rear direction after moving along the transparent plate 90. Alternatively, the movement along the transparent plate 90 may be started after moving along the front-rear direction at the position of the outer peripheral portion of the game board 110.

In the above description, the vertical movement has been described as an example of the effector 70 moving along the transparent plate 90. However, it may of course be moved in other directions, such as moving in the left-right direction or moving in the direction intersecting the up-down direction.
More specifically, the transparent plate 90 may be provided to be inclined with respect to the vertical direction, and the effector 70 may move along the inclined transparent plate 90 and move forward and backward with respect to the transparent plate 90. . Further, in the above description, it has been described that the stage body 70 is provided on the opposite side of the player (within the pachinko gaming machine 100 than the transparent plate 90) with the transparent plate 90 as a reference. As another example, the stage 70 may be provided on the same side as the player (outside of the pachinko gaming machine 100 with respect to the transparent plate 90). Further, the effect body 70 may be configured to move along the inner peripheral surface (or outer peripheral surface) of the transparent plate 90 and to advance and retreat with respect to the transparent plate 90. The transparent plate 90 is not limited to a member (plate-shaped member) whose inner peripheral surface and outer peripheral surface are substantially parallel, in other words, having a substantially uniform thickness, and has an uneven surface or curved surface on one or both of the inner peripheral surface and the outer peripheral surface. May be provided.

  In the above description, the reversal operation is performed after the effector 70 has moved from the non-effect position to the effect position. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Of course, the director 70 may be configured to perform the reversing operation without changing (moving) the position relative to the game board. Alternatively, the effect body 70 may execute the reversing operation while moving from the non-effect position to another position. Alternatively, there may be a plurality of production positions, and any of them may be able to perform a reversing operation.

FIGS. 35-21 is a figure for demonstrating the other application example of the title logo part 7. FIG. Further explaining, FIG. 35-21 is a schematic side view of the slot machine 900 provided with the title logo portion 7.
In the above description, the title logo portion 7 is provided in detail in the pachinko gaming machine 100, but may be provided in a gaming machine other than the pachinko gaming machine 100.

For example, as shown in FIGS. 35 to 21, the title logo unit 7 may be provided in the slot machine 900.
More specifically, the slot machine 900 shown in FIGS. 35-21 includes a reel 901 that displays a plurality of kinds of symbols while rotating, for example, from top to bottom, and a medal slot 903 into which medals are inserted. An operation lever 905 operated to start the rotation of the reel 901, a stop button 907 operated to stop the rotation of the reel 901, a medal payout exit 909 for paying out medals, and display according to the game A liquid crystal display 911 that displays effects and displays information, and a transparent plate 913 that covers the front surface of the liquid crystal display 911.

In addition, the slot machine 900 includes a title logo portion 7 in a space in the front-rear direction between the liquid crystal display 911 and the transparent plate 913. The title logo portion 7 moves in the vertical direction as described above, and moves between the effect position and the non-effect position while performing an operation of moving back and forth with respect to the transparent plate 913. Moreover, the title logo part 7 performs the inversion operation as described above at the effect position.
Here, it has been described that the title logo unit 7 can be provided in the slot machine 900. However, the above-described modeling movable body 4 (see FIG. 1) and the vehicle-type robot unit 5 (see FIG. 1) are also included in the slot machine 900. Can be provided.

Although various embodiments and modifications have been described above, it is of course possible to combine these embodiments and modifications.
Further, the present disclosure is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and can be implemented in various forms without departing from the gist of the present disclosure.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the following configuration is adopted in order to provide a gaming machine that can enhance the interest of the game when the player plays.
That is, a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 100) that performs a predetermined performance, and a plurality of decorative portions (for example, a reversing operation unit 71) that collectively form a predetermined shape, and the plurality of decorative portions (for example, A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 100) comprising rotation means (for example, a reversing driving unit 73) for rotating each of the reversing operation units 71) at positions separated from each other.
Here, when the rotating means (for example, the inversion driving unit 73) rotates the plurality of decoration units (for example, the inversion operation unit 71), each of the plurality of decoration units (for example, the inversion operation unit 71) The plurality of decoration parts (for example, the reversing operation unit 71) are moved in a direction away from each other, and the plurality of decoration parts (for example, the reversing operation unit 71) are assembled after the rotation. .

As described above, in the present embodiment, the following configuration is adopted in order to provide a gaming machine that can enhance the interest of the game when the player plays.
That is, a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 100) that performs a predetermined performance, each of a plurality of decoration parts (for example, a reversing operation part 71) and the plurality of decoration parts (for example, a reversing operation part 71). Direction of movement when moving between a rotating unit (for example, a rotating mechanism 733) that rotates the rotating unit and a position where each of the plurality of decorative portions (for example, the reversing operation unit 71) is gathered and spaced apart from each other. It is a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 100) characterized by comprising a moving means (for example, an expansion / contraction mechanism 735) that moves in a spiral manner.
Here, the moving means (for example, the expansion / contraction mechanism 735) may be characterized in that each of the plurality of decorative portions (for example, the reversing operation unit 71) is moved radially from the gathering position.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the following configuration is adopted in order to provide a gaming machine that can enhance the interest of the game when the player plays.
That is, a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 100) that performs a predetermined performance, and a surface (for example, a first display) that forms a display unit (for example, the display unit 71E) that performs a predetermined display at a position where they gather together. A plurality of decorative portions (for example, the reversing operation portion 71) each having a decorative plate 711A) and a position where each of the plurality of decorative portions (for example, the reversing operation portion 71) is separated from a position where they are separated from each other. And a moving means (for example, a reversing drive unit 73) for moving the plurality of decorative portions (for example, the reversing operation unit 71), and each of the plurality of decoration units (for example, the reversing operation unit 71) is moved. When the means (for example, the reversing drive unit 73) returns from the gathering position to the gathering position through the separated position, the display unit (for example, the reversing operation unit 71) by the display unit (for example, the reversing operation unit 71). Display unit 71E) by the display is the mobile unit (e.g., a game machine characterized by comprising different from the previous movement by inversion driving section 73) (e.g., a pachinko game machine 100).

As described above, in the present embodiment, the following configuration is adopted in order to provide a gaming machine that can enhance the interest of the game when the player plays.
That is, a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 100) that performs a predetermined effect, and a moving body (for example, the reversing operation unit 71) and a transparent that constitutes an outer surface of the gaming machine (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 100). First moving means (for example, base 835) that moves the moving body (for example, reversing operation unit 71) along a plate (for example, transparent plate 90) and the transparent plate (for example, transparent plate 90) A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 100) comprising: second moving means (for example, a slide unit 837) that moves the moving body (for example, the reversing operation unit 71) in a forward / backward direction. .

  As described above, various structures and controls of the movable accessory 115 have been described in this document. However, the application or combination of all or part of the described contents to other structures or controls may be performed unless otherwise described in this document. It is possible even if it exists. Although various modifications are also mentioned, it is possible to apply or combine the contents of such modifications to other structures, controls, and the like even when there is no mention in this document.

In the present embodiment, in the main control process of the game control unit 200, the operation of finally outputting the commands generated in each process of the main control process to the effect control unit 300 has been described (FIG. 5-3). reference).
In the present embodiment, in the basic process that is initially executed by the game control unit 200 when the power is restored, the main control process is performed in order to output a command or the like for instructing the initialization to the effect control unit 300. The function (subroutine) of the output control unit 240 used in the above is called and executed (see FIG. 5A).
In this embodiment, the command output from the game control unit 200 to the effect control unit 300 is composed of a “code unit” and a “data unit”, and an identification flag is provided for each head bit. This has been described (see FIG. 19-1).
Further, in the present embodiment, a configuration has been described in which a part of a “code part” of a command output from the game control unit 200 to the effect control unit 300 is used to describe a data value.

[Technical features of the present embodiment]
As described above, in this embodiment, in the main control process repeatedly executed at predetermined time intervals by the game control unit 200 in order to reduce the increase in the control command for controlling the operation of the game control means, one cycle At the end of the main control process, the commands generated by the execution of the one cycle are collected and output to the effect control unit 300. That is, a gaming machine that achieves the above-mentioned purpose is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 100) that produces an effect according to the progress of the game,
A game control means (for example, game control) that repeatedly executes a main control process, which is a series of processes related to the progress of a game, according to a predetermined condition and generates data including information related to the game obtained by executing the main control process. Part 200),
Each time the series of main control processes are executed in one cycle, output means for outputting the data generated by the execution of the one cycle after the last data is generated in the execution of the one cycle (for example, Output controller 240);
Production control means (for example, production control unit 300) that receives data output from the output means (for example, output control unit 240), and produces production based on the received data;
Is provided.
In this way, since it is not necessary to perform output processing for each generated data, control instructions for performing output processing can be reduced, and an increase in program size can be suppressed. In addition, since it is not necessary to perform output processing every time data is generated, the time required for the entire output processing can be shortened.
In more detail, in the above gaming machine,
Storage means (for example, RAM 203) for storing the data generated by the main control processing in a storage area (for example, command storage area) set for each data;
The game control means (for example, the game control unit 200) stores the data generated in the main control process in the storage area (for example, command storage area) associated with the generated data,
The output means (for example, the output control unit 240) checks whether data is stored in each storage area of the storage means (for example, the RAM 203), and obtains data from the storage area where the data is stored. Read and output.
In this way, each time the output process is performed, each storage area is checked and the stored data is output, so that leakage of data output can be prevented.

◆ Other gaming machines that achieve the above objectives
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 100) that produces an effect according to the progress of the game,
A game control means (for example, a special control different from the main control process according to a condition different from the main control process) Game control unit 200),
Production control means (for example, production control unit 300) that receives data output from the game control means (for example, game control unit 200) and performs processing related to production based on the data,
In the main control process, the process by the game control means (for example, the game control unit 200)
A portion that performs processing based on the progress of the game and calls and executes one or more first processing means (for example, the game control unit 200) that generates data including information obtained by executing the processing; ,
Second processing means (for example, output control unit 240) that outputs data generated by execution of the first processing means (for example, game control unit 200) to the effect control means (for example, effect control unit 300). And a part to call and execute
In the special process, the process by the game control means (for example, the game control unit 200)
A part for executing a setting process for setting a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 100);
A part for calling the second processing means (for example, the output control unit 240) in the main control process and outputting the data generated in the setting process to the effect control means (for example, the effect control unit 300); , Including.
In this way, there is no need to prepare individual control instructions for the output processing of data generated by special processing, so control instructions for output processing are reduced and the increase in program size is suppressed. can do.
In more detail, in the above gaming machine,
Storage means (for example, RAM 203) for storing the data generated in the main control process in a storage area set for each data;
The first processing means (for example, the game control unit 200) in the main control process transfers the data generated by executing the process to the storage area (for example, command storage area) associated with the generated data. Memorize sequentially,
The second processing means (for example, the output control unit 240) in the main control process checks whether data is stored in each storage area of the storage means (for example, the RAM 203), and stores the data. Read and output data from the storage area
In the setting process in the special process, the data generated in the setting process is stored in a predetermined storage area in the storage unit (for example, the RAM 203).
In this way, each time the output process is performed, each storage area is checked and the stored data is output, so that leakage of data output can be prevented.

Also, in this embodiment, in order to improve the accuracy of data transmission from the game control means to the effect control means, a predetermined bit of “code” as the first data portion and “data” as the second data portion A predetermined bit of “is used as a flag for identifying“ code ”and“ data ”. That is, a gaming machine that achieves the above-mentioned purpose is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 100) that produces an effect according to the progress of the game,
Game control means (for example, game control unit 200) that executes main control processing related to the progress of the game, generates and outputs data including information related to the game obtained by executing the main control processing;
Production control means (for example, production control unit 300) that receives data output from the game control means (for example, game control unit 200) and performs processing related to production based on the received data,
The data generated by the game control means (for example, the game control unit 200) is
a first data part (for example, “code”) having a size of a bit (a is an integer of 2 or more) and the value of the first 1 bit specified as either 1 or 0;
The size of n × a bits (n is an integer equal to or greater than 1), and the value of the first 1 bit is specified to be different from the value of the first 1 bit of the first data portion (for example, “code”) And a second data portion (eg, “data”).
In this way, since the first data portion and the second data portion can be clearly distinguished by recognizing the value of the leading 1 bit, data transmission from the game control means to the effect control means The accuracy can be improved.
More preferably, in the above gaming machine,
The second data portion (for example, “data”) of the data generated by the game control means (for example, the game control portion 200) has the same value as the value of the first 1 bit for every a bits from the beginning. Is set.
In this way, even when the size of the second data portion is large, it is easy to identify each of the second data portions by dividing each specific size.

In the present embodiment, the data sent from the game control means to the effect control means even when it is necessary to send large-size data, such as when a command specifying a variation pattern to be executed is sent. In order to suppress an increase in the overall size, a predetermined bit of “code” that is the first data portion is used to describe the data value, and a part of “code” and “data” that is the second data portion In this paper, we proposed a method for describing data values. That is, a gaming machine that achieves the above-mentioned purpose is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 100) that produces an effect according to the progress of the game,
Game control means (for example, game control unit 200) that executes main control processing related to the progress of the game, generates and outputs data including information related to the game obtained by executing the main control processing;
Production control means (for example, production control unit 300) that receives data output from the game control means (for example, game control unit 200) and performs processing related to production based on the data,
The data generated by the game control means (for example, the game control unit 200) is
a first data part (for example, “code”) having a size of a bit (a is an integer of 3 or more) and the value of the first 1 bit specified as either 1 or 0;
The size of n × a bits (n is an integer equal to or greater than 1), and the value of the first 1 bit is specified to be different from the value of the first 1 bit of the first data portion (for example, “code”) A second data portion (e.g., "data"),
A predetermined type of data is recorded using a predetermined bit constituting the first data part (eg “code”) and a bit constituting the second data part (eg “data”), Another type of data different from the predetermined type of data can be recorded using the remaining bits excluding the predetermined bit in the first data portion (for example, “code”). .
In addition, another gaming machine according to the present invention that achieves the above object is as follows:
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 100) that produces an effect according to the progress of the game,
Game control means (for example, game control unit 200) that executes main control processing related to the progress of the game, generates and outputs data including information related to the game obtained by executing the main control processing;
Production control means (for example, production control unit 300) that receives data output from the game control means (for example, game control unit 200) and performs processing related to production based on the data,
The data generated by the game control means (for example, the game control unit 200) is
a first data part (for example, “code”) having a size of a bit (a is an integer of 3 or more) and the value of the first 1 bit specified as either 1 or 0;
a second data portion (for example, “data” having a size of a bit and a value of the leading 1 bit being different from a value of the leading 1 bit of the first data portion (for example, “code”) )), And
B bits (b is smaller than a-1 and an integer of 1 or more) constituting the first data portion (for example, “code”), and a constituting the second data portion (for example, “data”) Bits can be used to record data having a size of (a + b) bits.
With the above configuration, the size of data to be recorded in the second data portion can be increased without changing the total size of the first data portion and the second data portion. When large data is sent from the game control means to the effect control means, an increase in the size of the entire transmitted data can be suppressed.

  The pachinko gaming machine 100 (see FIG. 1) is an example of a gaming machine. The game control unit 200 (see FIG. 3) is an example of a game control unit. The production control unit 300 (see FIG. 3) is an example of production control means. The output control unit 240 (see FIG. 4) is an example of an output unit. The RAM 203 (see FIG. 3) is an example of a storage unit. The command storage area is an example of a storage area.

71... Inversion operation unit (an example of a plurality of decoration units)
71E ... Display unit (an example of a display unit)
73... Reversing drive unit (an example of moving means)
100 ... Pachinko machine (an example of a game machine)

The present invention that achieves the above object is realized as the following gaming machine. This gaming machine is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 100) that performs a predetermined effect, and forms a surface (for example, a display unit 71E) that performs a predetermined display at a position where the gaming machines gather together. , A plurality of decorative portions (for example, the reversing operation portion 71) each having the first decorative plate 711A) and a position where each of the plurality of decorative portions (for example, the reversing operation portion 71) is separated from the gathering position. Moving means (for example, a reversal drive unit 73) for moving the plurality of decoration units (for example, the reversing operation unit 71) between each of the plurality of decoration units (for example, the reversing operation unit 71). When the moving means (for example, the reversing drive unit 73) returns from the gathering position to the gathering position via the separated position , the plurality of decoration parts (for example, the reversing operation unit 71) rotate each time. Rotate around axis Moves in the direction along the axis of rotation of Rutotomoni each said plurality of decorative portions (e.g., reversing the operation unit 71) The display unit according to each of the (e.g., display unit 71E) by the display is the mobile unit (e.g., inverted A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 100), which is different from that before the movement by the driving unit 73).

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that performs a predetermined performance,
A plurality of decorative portions each having a surface forming a display portion for performing a predetermined display at a position where they gather together;
A moving means for moving the plurality of decoration portions between a position where each of the plurality of decoration portions gathers and a position where they are separated from each other;
With
When each of the plurality of decorative parts returns from the gathering position to the gathering position via the separating position by the moving means, the display by the display section by each of the plurality of decorative parts is moved by the moving means. A gaming machine that is different from the previous one.

Images